Technical
Reference
Guide
For the
Compaq iPAQ Internet Device
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reader Feedback
Please feel free to send any questions, suggestions, corrections, or comments regarding this
document please to the following email address:
When responding, please state the title of the referenced document.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
NOTICE
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
COMPAQ COMPUTER CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR
EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS HEREIN; NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE,
OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF MANUFACTURERS TO
ENSURE THAT DEVICES DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH COMPAQ PRODUCTS
COMPLY WITH FCC CLASS B EMISSIONS REQUIREMENTS.
This guide contains information protected by copyright. Except for use as a reference for the
described Compaq product, no part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced in any
form without prior written consent from Compaq Computer Corporation.
2000 Compaq Computer Corporation
All rights reserved.
Compaq and the Compaq logo are regiserted in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.
iPAQ is a trademark of Compaq Information Technologies Group, L.P.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and other names of Microsoft products referenced herein are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Celeron and MMX are trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of other companies.
For more information regarding specifications and Compaq-specific parts please contact Compaq
Computer Corporation at http://www.compaq.com .
Technical Reference Guide
For the
Compaq iPAQ Internet Device
First Edition – March 2000
Document Number 127M-0300A-WWEN
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
i
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
ii
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
ABOUT THIS GUIDE ........................................................................................................... 1-1
USING THIS GUIDE ..................................................................................................... 1-1
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCES.................................................................. 1-1
MODEL NUMBERING CONVENTION........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS.......................................................................................... 1-2
VALUES........................................................................................................................ 1-2
RANGES........................................................................................................................ 1-2
SIGNAL LABELS.......................................................................................................... 1-2
REGISTER NOTATION AND USAGE ......................................................................... 1-2
BIT NOTATION............................................................................................................ 1-2
COMMON ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS.............................................................. 1-3
1.4
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW.....................................................................................................
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 2-1
FEATURES AND OPTIONS................................................................................................. 2-2
STANDARD FEATURES.............................................................................................. 2-2
OPTIONS....................................................................................................................... 2-3
MECHANICAL DESIGN ...................................................................................................... 2-4
CABINET LAYOUTS.................................................................................................... 2-4
CHASSIS LAYOUT....................................................................................................... 2-6
SYSTEM BOARD LAYOUTS....................................................................................... 2-7
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE.................................................................................................. 2-8
PROCESSORS............................................................................................................. 2-10
CHIPSET ..................................................................................................................... 2-12
SUPPORT COMPONENTS.......................................................................................... 2-13
SYSTEM MEMORY.................................................................................................... 2-13
MASS STORAGE........................................................................................................ 2-14
SERIAL AND PARALLEL INTERFACES .................................................................. 2-14
UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS INTERFACE ................................................................... 2-14
GRAPHICS SUBSYSTEM........................................................................................... 2-14
AUDIO SUBSYSTEM ................................................................................................. 2-15
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................................................. 2-15
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.5
CHAPTER 3 PROCESSOR/MEMORY SUBSYSTEM ........................................................................
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.3
3.4
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 3-1
PROCESSOR......................................................................................................................... 3-2
CELERON PROCESSOR............................................................................................... 3-2
PENTIUM III PROCESSOR........................................................................................... 3-3
PROCESSOR UPGRADING.......................................................................................... 3-4
MEMORY SUBSYSTEM...................................................................................................... 3-5
SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION........................................................................................ 3-8
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
iii
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM SUPPORT.........................................................................................................
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 4-1
PCI BUS OVERVIEW........................................................................................................... 4-2
PCI BUS TRANSACTIONS........................................................................................... 4-3
PCI INTERRUPT MAPPING......................................................................................... 4-6
PCI POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT..................................................................... 4-6
PCI SUB-BUSSES.......................................................................................................... 4-6
PCI CONFIGURATION................................................................................................. 4-7
AGP BUS OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 4-8
BUS TRANSACTIONS.................................................................................................. 4-8
AGP CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................. 4-11
INTERRUPTS ..................................................................................................................... 4-12
MASKABLE INTERRUPTS ........................................................................................ 4-12
NON-MASKABLE INTERRUPTS............................................................................... 4-14
INTERVAL TIMER............................................................................................................. 4-16
SYSTEM CLOCK DISTRIBUTION.................................................................................... 4-16
REAL-TIME CLOCK AND CONFIGURATION MEMORY............................................... 4-17
CMOS ARCHIVE ........................................................................................................ 4-18
STANDARD CMOS LOCATIONS.............................................................................. 4-18
CMOS FEATURE BITS............................................................................................... 4-26
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT................................................................................................. 4-27
SECURITY FUNCTIONS............................................................................................ 4-27
POWER MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................... 4-28
THERMAL SENSING AND COOLING ...................................................................... 4-28
SYSTEM I/O MAP.............................................................................................................. 4-29
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.9
CHAPTER 5 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACES.....................................................................................
5.1
5.2
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 5-1
ENHANCED IDE INTERFACE ............................................................................................ 5-1
IDE PROGRAMMING................................................................................................... 5-1
IDE CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................ 5-3
DISKETTE DRIVE INTERFACE.......................................................................................... 5-4
SERIAL INTERFACE ........................................................................................................... 5-5
RS-232 INTERFACE ..................................................................................................... 5-5
SERIAL TEST INTERFACE ........................................................................................ 5-6
SERIAL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING...................................................................... 5-6
PARALLEL INTERFACE ..................................................................................................... 5-8
STANDARD PARALLEL PORT MODE ....................................................................... 5-8
ENHANCED PARALLEL PORT MODE....................................................................... 5-9
EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PORT MODE ................................................................. 5-9
PARALLEL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING.............................................................. 5-10
PARALLEL INTERFACE CONNECTOR ................................................................... 5-14
KEYBOARD/POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE ............................................................... 5-15
KEYBOARD INTERFACE OPERATION ................................................................... 5-15
POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE OPERATION ....................................................... 5-17
KEYBOARD/POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE PROGRAMMING ......................... 5-17
KEYBOARD/POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE CONNECTOR................................ 5-21
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
iv
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS INTERFACE........................................................................... 5-22
USB DATA FORMATS ............................................................................................... 5-22
USB PROGRAMMING................................................................................................ 5-24
USB CONNECTOR ..................................................................................................... 5-25
USB CABLE DATA..................................................................................................... 5-25
AUDIO SUBSYSTEM......................................................................................................... 5-26
FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS......................................................................................... 5-26
AC97 AUDIO CONTROLLER..................................................................................... 5-28
AC97 LINK BUS ......................................................................................................... 5-28
AUDIO CODEC........................................................................................................... 5-29
AUDIO PROGRAMMING........................................................................................... 5-30
AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 5-31
NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER.......................................................................... 5-32
WAKE ON LAN .......................................................................................................... 5-33
ALERT ON LAN ......................................................................................................... 5-33
POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT.......................................................................... 5-34
NIC PROGRAMMING................................................................................................. 5-35
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.8.6
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
CHAPTER 6 GRAPHICS SUBSYSTEM...............................................................................................
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.6
6.7
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 6-1
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................. 6-2
FEATURE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 6-3
DISPLAY MODES................................................................................................................ 6-4
UPGRADING ........................................................................................................................ 6-4
PROGRAMMING.................................................................................................................. 6-5
CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................ 6-5
CONTROL..................................................................................................................... 6-5
MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT CONTROL ............................................................... 6-6
MONITOR CONNECTOR .................................................................................................... 6-6
CHAPTER 7 POWER SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION.......................................................................
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.4
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 7-1
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY/CONTROL .......................................................................... 7-1
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY...................................................................................... 7-2
POWER CONTROL....................................................................................................... 7-3
POWER DISTRIBUTION...................................................................................................... 7-4
3.3/5/12 VDC DISTRIBUTION...................................................................................... 7-4
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION................................................................................ 7-4
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION..................................................................................................... 7-5
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
v
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
CHAPTER 8 BIOS ROM .......................................................................................................................
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................. 8-1
DESKTOP MANAGEMENT SUPPORT ............................................................................... 8-2
SYSTEM ID................................................................................................................... 8-4
SYSTEM INFORMATION TABLE ............................................................................... 8-4
EDID RETRIEVE .......................................................................................................... 8-5
DRIVE FAULT PREDICTION....................................................................................... 8-5
SYSTEM MAP RETRIEVAL......................................................................................... 8-6
FLASH ROM FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 8-7
POWER BUTTON FUNCTIONS................................................................................... 8-7
ACCESSING CMOS...................................................................................................... 8-8
ACCESSING CMOS FEATURE BITS........................................................................... 8-8
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10 SECURITY FUNCTIONS............................................................................................ 8-10
8.3
8.4
8.4.1
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.6
8.7
MEMORY DETECTION AND CONFIGURATION............................................................ 8-11
PNP SUPPORT.................................................................................................................... 8-12
SMBIOS....................................................................................................................... 8-13
POWER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS ............................................................................ 8-14
INDEPENDENT PM SUPPORT .................................................................................. 8-14
ACPI SUPPORT........................................................................................................... 8-15
APM 1.2 SUPPORT ..................................................................................................... 8-15
USB LEGACY SUPPORT ................................................................................................... 8-17
BIOS UPGRADING............................................................................................................. 8-18
APPENDIX A ERROR MESSAGES AND CODES...............................................................................
A.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................. A-1
A.2 POWER-ON MESSAGES..................................................................................................... A-1
A.3 BEEP/KEYBOARD LED CODES ........................................................................................ A-1
A.4 POWER-ON SELF TEST (POST) MESSAGES.................................................................... A-2
A.5 PROCESSOR ERROR MESSAGES (1XX XX
A.6 MEMORY ERROR MESSAGES (2XX XX)........................................................................... A-4
A.7 KEYBOARD ERROR MESSAGES (30X-XX) ....................................................................... A-4
A.8 PRINTER ERROR MESSAGES (4XX XX) ............................................................................ A-5
A.9 VIDEO (GRAPHICS) ERROR MESSAGES (5XX XX
-
) ...................................................................... A-3
-
-
-
).......................................................... A-5
) ......................................................... A-6
A.10
A.11
A.12
A.13
A.14
A.15
A.16
A.17
A.18
A.19
A.20
A.21
A.22
A.23
DISKETTE DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES (6XX XX
-
SERIAL INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (11XX XX
MODEM COMMUNICATIONS ERROR MESSAGES (12XX XX
SYSTEM STATUS ERROR MESSAGES (16XX XX)........................................................ A-8
HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES (17XX XX
HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES (19XX XX
-
) ................................................... A-6
-
).................................... A-7
-
-
-
) ............................................................... A-8
) ............................................................... A-9
VIDEO (GRAPHICS) ERROR MESSAGES (24XX XX
AUDIO ERROR MESSAGES (3206-XX)......................................................................... A-10
DVD/CD-ROM ERROR MESSAGES (33XX XX)............................................................ A-10
NETWORK INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (60XX XX) ........................................... A-10
SCSI INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (65XX XX, 66XX XX, 67XX XX) ....................... A-11
-
) .................................................... A-9
-
-
-
-
-
POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (8601-XX).............................. A-11
CEMM PRIVILEDGED OPS ERROR MESSAGES........................................................ A-12
CEMM EXCEPTION ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................... A-12
vi
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
APPENDIX B ASCII CHARACTER SET .............................................................................................
B.1
INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................B-1
APPENDIX C KEYBOARD...................................................................................................................
C.1
C.2
INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................C-1
KEYSTROKE PROCESSING................................................................................................C-2
C.2.1
C.2.2
C.2.3
C.2.4
C.2.5
C.2.6
PS/2-TYPE KEYBOARD TRANSMISSIONS................................................................C-3
USB-TYPE KEYBOARD TRANSMISSIONS................................................................C-4
KEYBOARD LAYOUTS ...............................................................................................C-5
KEYS.............................................................................................................................C-8
KEYBOARD COMMANDS.........................................................................................C-11
SCAN CODES .............................................................................................................C-11
C.3
CONNECTORS...................................................................................................................C-15
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
vii
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 2–1. COMPAQ IPAQ INTERNET DEVICE WITH MONITOR............................................................. 2-1
FIGURE 2–2. COMPAQ IPAQ INTERNET DEVICE, FRONT VIEW................................................................ 2-4
FIGURE 2–3. COMPAQ IPAQ INTERNET DEVICE, REAR VIEWS................................................................ 2-5
FIGURE 2–4. COMPAQ IPAQ INTERNET DEVICE CHASSIS LAYOUT, RIDE SIDE VIEW................................ 2-6
FIGURE 2–5. COMPAQ IPAQ SYSTEM BOARD LAYOUTS ......................................................................... 2-7
FIGURE 2–6. COMPAQ IPAQ ARCHITECTURE, BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 2-9
FIGURE 2–7. PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY AND MOUNTING .......................................................................... 2-11
FIGURE 3–1. PROCESSOR/MEMORY SUBSYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ............................................................ 3-1
FIGURE 3–2. CELERON PROCESSOR NTERNAL
I
ARCHITECTURE............................................................... 3-2
ARCHITECTURE........................................................... 3-3
FIGURE 3–3. PENTIUM III PROCESSOR NTERNAL
I
FIGURE 3–4. SYSTEM MEMORY MAP..................................................................................................... 3-7
FIGURE 4-1. PCI BUS DEVICES AND FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................... 4-2
FIGURE 4-2. TYPE 0 CONFIGURATION CYCLE......................................................................................... 4-4
FIGURE 4-3. PCI CONFIGURATION SPACE MAP ...................................................................................... 4-5
FIGURE 4-4. AGP 1X DATA TRANSFER (PEAK TRANSFER RATE: 266 MB/S)........................................... 4-9
FIGURE 4-5. AGP 2X DATA TRANSFER (PEAK TRANSFER RATE: 532 MB/S)......................................... 4-10
FIGURE 4-6. MASKABLE NTERRUPT
I
PROCESSING, BLOCK DIAGRAM..................................................... 4-12
FIGURE 4-7. CONFIGURATION MEMORY MAP....................................................................................... 4-17
FIGURE 5-1. 40-PIN PRIMARY IDE CONNECTOR ON SYSTEM BOARD
FIGURE 5-2. 50-PIN SECONDARY IDE CONNECTOR ON SYSTEM AND DAUGHTER BOARDS
FIGURE 5-3. SERIAL NTERFACE CONNECTOR (MALE DB-9 AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF CHASSIS) ............... 5-5
FIGURE 5-4. SERIAL NTERFACE HEADER ON LEGACY FREE SYSTEM BOARD)........................................... 5-6
FIGURE 5-5. PARALLEL NTERFACE CONNECTOR (FEMALE DB-25 AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF CHASSIS).... 5-14
FIGURE 5-6. 8042-TO-KEYBOARD TRANSMISSION OF CODE EDH, TIMING DIAGRAM ............................. 5-15
FIGURE 5-7. KEYBOARD OR POINTING DEVICE NTERFACE CONNECTOR ................................................ 5-21
(
)...................................................... 5-3
(
)....................... 5-4
I
I
(
-
I
I
FIGURE 5-8. USB I/F, BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................................... 5-22
FIGURE 5-9. USB PACKET FORMATS.................................................................................................... 5-23
FIGURE 5-10. UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS CONNECTOR.............................................................................. 5-25
FIGURE 5-11. AUDIO SUBSYSTEM FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ......................................................... 5-27
FIGURE 5-12. AC’97 LINK BUS PROTOCOL .......................................................................................... 5-28
FIGURE 5-13. AD1881 AUDIO CODEC FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM................................................... 5-29
FIGURE 5-14. 10/100 TX NETWORK NTERFACE CONTROLLER BLOCK DIAGRAM................................... 5-32
I
FIGURE 5-15. ETHERNET TPE CONNECTOR (RJ-45, VIEWED FROM CARD EDGE)..................................... 5-36
FIGURE 6-1. GRAPHICS SUBSYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 6-2
FIGURE 6-2. 82810E/DC-100 INTEGRATED GRAPHICS CONTROLLER ....................................................... 6-3
FIGURE 7–1. POWER DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL, BLOCK DIAGRAM..................................................... 7-1
FIGURE 7–2. POWER CABLE DIAGRAM .................................................................................................. 7-4
FIGURE 7–3. SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM....................................................................................... 7-5
FIGURE 7–4. HEADER PINOUTS ............................................................................................................. 7-6
FIGURE B–1. ASCII CHARACTER SET ...................................................................................................B-1
viii Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
FIGURE C–1. KEYSTROKE PROCESSING ELEMENTS, BLOCK DIAGRAM ....................................................C-2
FIGURE C–2. PS/2 KEYBOARD-TO-SYSTEM TRANSMISSION, TIMING DIAGRAM ......................................C-3
FIGURE C–3. U.S. ENGLISH (101-KEY) KEYBOARD KEY POSITIONS.......................................................C-5
FIGURE C–4. NATIONAL (102-KEY) KEYBOARD KEY POSITIONS............................................................C-5
FIGURE C–5. U.S. ENGLISH WINDOWS (101W-KEY) KEYBOARD KEY POSITIONS ...................................C-6
FIGURE C–6. NATIONAL WINDOWS (102W-KEY) KEYBOARD KEY POSITIONS ........................................C-6
FIGURE C–7. EASY ACCESS KEY POSITIONS ..........................................................................................C-7
FIGURE C–8. PS/2 KEYBOARD CABLE CONNECTOR (MALE).................................................................C-15
FIGURE C–9. USB KEYBOARD CABLE CONNECTOR (MALE).................................................................C-15
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
ix
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1–1. ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS....................................................................................... 1-3
TABLE 2-1. FEATURE DIFFERENCE MATRIX ........................................................................................... 2-2
TABLE 2-2. ARCHITECTURAL COMPARISON ............................................................................................. 2-8
TABLE 2-3. INTEL 810E CHIPSET COMPARISON .................................................................................... 2-12
TABLE 2-4. SUPPORT COMPONENT FUNCTIONS.................................................................................... 2-13
TABLE 2-5. ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 2-15
TABLE 2-6. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................ 2-15
TABLE 2-7. PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................ 2-16
TABLE 2-8. MULTIBAY 24X CD-ROM DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS............................................................. 2-16
TABLE 2-9. MULTIBAY 24X CD-ROM DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS............................................................. 2-17
TABLE 2-10. HARD DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 2-17
TABLE 3–1. CELERON PROCESSOR STATISTICAL COMPARISON ............................................................... 3-2
TABLE 3–2. PENTIUM III PROCESSOR STATISTICAL COMPARISON ........................................................... 3-3
TABLE 3–3. SPD ADDRESS MAP (SDRAM DIMM)................................................................................. 3-6
TABLE 3–4. HOST/PCI BRIDGE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (GMCH, FUNCTION 0)................................ 3-8
TABLE 4-1. PCI DEVICE CONFIGURATION ACCESS................................................................................. 4-4
TABLE 4-2. SYSTEM BOARD PCI DEVICE DENTIFICATION ..................................................................... 4-5
I
TABLE 4-3. LPC BRIDGE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (ICH, FUNCTION 0).............................................. 4-7
TABLE 4-4. PCI/AGP BRIDGE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (MCH, FUNCTION 1) .................................. 4-11
TABLE 4-5. MASKABLE NTERRUPT
I
PRIORITIES AND ASSIGNMENTS ...................................................... 4-13
CONTROL REGISTERS .................................................................... 4-13
TABLE 4-6. MASKABLE NTERRUPT
I
TABLE 4-7. INTERVAL TIMER FUNCTIONS............................................................................................ 4-16
TABLE 4-8. INTERVAL TIMER CONTROL REGISTERS ............................................................................. 4-16
TABLE 4-9. CLOCK GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION........................................................................... 4-16
TABLE 4-10. CONFIGURATION MEMORY (CMOS) MAP ....................................................................... 4-18
TABLE 4-11. SYSTEM I/O MAP ........................................................................................................... 4-29
TABLE 5–1. IDE PCI CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ................................................................................ 5-2
TABLE 5–2. IDE BUS MASTER CONTROL REGISTERS.............................................................................. 5-2
TABLE 5–3. 40-PIN PRIMARY IDE CONNECTOR PINOUT......................................................................... 5-3
TABLE 5–4. 50-PIN SECONDARY IDE CONNECTOR PINOUT.................................................................... 5-4
TABLE 5–5. DB-9 SERIAL CONNECTOR PINOUT...................................................................................... 5-5
TABLE 5–6. SERIAL NTERFACE
TABLE 5–7. SERIAL NTERFACE
TABLE 5–8. PARALLEL NTERFACE
TABLE 5–9. PARALLEL NTERFACE
I
I
CONFIGURATION REGISTERS.................................................................. 5-6
CONTROL REGISTERS............................................................................ 5-7
I
I
CONFIGURATION REGISTERS........................................................... 5-10
CONTROL REGISTERS...................................................................... 5-11
TABLE 5–10. DB-25 PARALLEL CONNECTOR PINOUT .......................................................................... 5-14
TABLE 5–11. 8042-TO-KEYBOARD COMMANDS .................................................................................. 5-16
TABLE 5–12. KEYBOARD NTERFACE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ....................................................... 5-17
I
TABLE 5–13. CPU COMMANDS TO THE 8042...................................................................................... 5-19
TABLE 5–14. KEYBOARD/POINTING DEVICE CONNECTOR PINOUT........................................................ 5-21
TABLE 5–15. USB INTERFACE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS................................................................. 5-24
TABLE 5–16. USB CONTROL REGISTERS............................................................................................. 5-24
TABLE 5–17. USB CONNECTOR PINOUT.............................................................................................. 5-25
TABLE 5–18. USB CABLE LENGTH DATA............................................................................................ 5-25
x
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
TABLE 5–19. AC’97 AUDIO CONTROLLER PCI CONFIGURATION REGISTERS ........................................ 5-30
TABLE 5–20. AC’97 AUDIO CODEC CONTROL REGISTERS ................................................................... 5-30
TABLE 5–21. AUDIO SUBSYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................... 5-31
TABLE 5–22. AOL EVENTS ................................................................................................................ 5-33
TABLE 5–23. NIC CONTROLLER PCI CONFIGURATION REGISTERS....................................................... 5-35
TABLE 5–24. NIC CONTROL REGISTERS ............................................................................................. 5-35
TABLE 5–25. 82559 NIC OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 5-36
TABLE 6-1. INTEL GRAPHICS DISPLAY MODES....................................................................................... 6-4
TABLE 6-2. PCI CONFIGURATION SPACE REGISTERS.............................................................................. 6-5
TABLE 6-3. STANDARD VGA MODE I/O MAPPING ................................................................................ 6-5
TABLE 6-4. MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT CONDITIONS .................................................................... 6-6
TABLE 6-5. DB-15 MONITOR CONNECTOR PINOUT................................................................................ 6-6
TABLE 8-1. DESKTOP MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS (INT15)..................................................................... 8-2
TABLE 8-2. CMOS FEATURE BITS ........................................................................................................ 8-9
TABLE 8-3. PNP BIOS FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................... 8-12
TABLE 8-4. APM BIOS FUNCTIONS (INT15)...................................................................................... 8-17
TABLE A–1. POWER-ON MESSAGES ..................................................................................................... A-1
TABLE A–2. BEEP/KEYBOARD LED CODES.......................................................................................... A-1
TABLE A–3. POWER-ON SELF TEST (POST) MESSAGES........................................................................ A-2
TABLE A–4. SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES............................................................................................... A-3
TABLE A–5. MEMORY ERROR MESSAGES............................................................................................. A-4
TABLE A–6. KEYBOARD ERROR MESSAGES.......................................................................................... A-4
TABLE A–7. PRINTER ERROR MESSAGES.............................................................................................. A-5
TABLE A–8. VIDEO (GRAPHICS) ERROR MESSAGES .............................................................................. A-5
TABLE A–9. DISKETTE DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES.................................................................................. A-6
TABLE A–10. SERIAL NTERFACE
I
ERROR MESSAGES............................................................................. A-6
ERROR MESSAGES............................................................................. A-7
TABLE A–11. SERIAL NTERFACE
I
TABLE A–12. SYSTEM STATUS ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................................ A-8
TABLE A–13. HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES...................................................................................... A-8
TABLE A–14. HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES...................................................................................... A-9
TABLE A–15. HARD DRIVE MESSAGES ................................................................................................. A-9
TABLE A–16. AUDIO ERROR MESSAGES............................................................................................. A-10
TABLE A–17. DVD/CD-ROM DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................... A-10
TABLE A–18. NETWORK NTERFACE
TABLE A–19. SCSI INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES ............................................................................. A-11
TABLE A–20. POINTING DEVICE NTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES........................................................... A-11
I
ERROR MESSAGES ...................................................................... A-10
I
TABLE A–21. CEMM PRIVILEGED OPS ERROR MESSAGES.................................................................. A-12
TABLE A–22. CEMM EXCEPTION ERROR MESSAGES ......................................................................... A-12
TABLE C–1. KEYBOARD TO
-
-SYSTEM COMMANDS ...............................................................................C-11
TABLE C–2. KEYBOARD SCAN CODES.................................................................................................C-12
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
xi
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
xii Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide provides technical information about the Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices.
This document includes information regarding system design, function, and features that can be
used by programmers, engineers, technicians, and system administrators.
This guide and any applicable addendum are available online at the following location:
http://www.compaq.com/support/techpubs/technical_reference_guides/index.html
1.1.1 USING THIS GUIDE
The chapters of this guide primarily describe the hardware and firmware elements and primarily
deal with the system board and the power supply assembly. The appendices contain general
information about standard peripheral devices such as the keyboard.
1.1.2 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOURCES
For more information on chipset components mentioned in this guide refer to the indicated
manufacturers’ documentation, which may be available at the following online sources:
♦
♦
♦
Compaq Computer Corporation: http://www.compaq.com
Intel Corporation: http://www.intel.com
Standard Microsystems Corporation: http://www.smsc.com
1.2
MODEL NUMBERING CONVENTION
The model numbering convention for Compaq iPAQ units is as follows:
iPAQ/XNNN/Nb/N/NNN
Memory (in MB)
Operating system: 4 = Win NT 4.0; 9 = Win95/98
Chipset type (b = 810e)
Hard drive size (in GB)
Processor speed (in MHz)
Processor type: C = Celeron; P = Pentium
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 1-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.3
NOTATIONAL CONVENTIONS
1.3.1 VALUES
Hexadecimal values are indicated by a numerical or alpha-numerical value followed by the letter
“h.” Binary values are indicated by a value of ones and zeros followed by the letter “b.”
Numerical values that have no succeeding letter can be assumed to be decimal.
1.3.2 RANGES
Ranges or limits for a parameter are shown using the following methods:
Example A:
Example B:
Bits <7..4> = bits 7, 6, 5, and 4.
IRQ3-7, 9 = IRQ signals 3 through 7, and IRQ signal 9
1.3.3 SIGNAL LABELS
Signal names are indicated using abbreviations, acronyms, or, if possible, the full signal name in
all capital letters. Signals that are meant to be active (asserted) low are indicated with a dash
immediately following the name.
1.3.4 REGISTER NOTATION AND USAGE
This guide uses standard Intel naming conventions in discussing the microprocessor’s (CPU)
internal registers. Registers that are accessed through programmable I/O using an indexing
scheme are indicated using the following format:
03C5.17h
Index port
Data port
In the example above, register 03C5.17h is accessed by writing the index port value 17h to the
index address (03C4h), followed by a write to or a read from port 03C5h.
1.3.5 BIT NOTATION
Bit values are labeled with bit <0> representing the least-significant bit (LSb) and bit <7>
representing the most-significant bit (MSb) of a byte. Bytes, words, double words, and quad
words are typically shown with most-significant portions on the left or top and the least-
significant portions on the right or bottom respectively.
1-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
1.4
COMMON ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Table 1-1 lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this guide.
Table 1-1.
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronym/Abbreviation
A
Description
ampere
AC
alternating current
ACPI
A/D
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface
analog-to-digital
AGP
API
APM
AOL
Accelerated graphics port
application programming interface
advanced power management
Alert-ON-LAN
ASIC
AT
ATA
ATAPI
AVI
AVGA
BAT
application-specific integrated circuit
1) attention (modem commands) 2) 286-based PC architecture
AT attachment (IDE protocol)
AT attachment w/packet interface extensions
audio-video interleaved
Advanced VGA
Basic assurance test
BCD
BIOS
bis
binary-coded decimal
basic input/output system
second/new revision
BitBLT
BNC
bps or b/s
BSP
bit block transfer
Bayonet Neill-Concelman (connector)
bits per second
Bootstrap processor
BTO
Built to order
CAS
CD
column address strobe
compact disk
CD-ROM
CDS
CF
compact disk read-only memory
compact disk system
carry flag
CGA
Ch
color graphics adapter
channel
cm
centimeter
CMC
CMOS
Cntlr
Cntrl
codec
CPQ
CPU
CRT
CSM
CTO
DAA
DAC
DC
cache/memory controller
complimentary metal-oxide semiconductor (configuration memory)
controller
control
compressor/decompressor
Compaq
central processing unit
cathode ray tube
Compaq system management / Compaq server management
Configure to order
direct access arrangement
digital-to-analog converter
direct current
DCH
DDC
DF
DOS compatibility hole
Display Data Channel
direction flag
Continued
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 1-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction
Table 1-1. Acronyms and Abbreviations Continued
Acronym/Abbreviation
Description
DIMM
DIN
DIP
dual inline memory module
Deutche IndustriNorm (connector standard)
dual inline package
DMA
DMI
dpi
direct memory access
Desktop management interface
dots per inch
DRAM
DRQ
EDID
EDO
EEPROM
EGA
EIA
EISA
EPP
EIDE
ESCD
EV
dynamic random access memory
data request
extended display identification data
extended data out (RAM type)
electrically eraseable PROM
enhanced graphics adapter
Electronic Industry Association
extended ISA
enhanced parallel port
enhanced IDE
Extended System Configuration Data (format)
Environmental Variable (data)
Exchangeable Card Architecture
first in / first out
ExCA
FIFO
FL
flag (register)
FM
frequency modulation
fast page mode (RAM type)
Floating point unit (numeric or math coprocessor)
Frames per second
FPM
FPU
FPS
ft
foot
GB
gigabyte
GMCH
GND
GPIO
GPOC
GART
GUI
h
Graphics/memory controller hub
ground
general purpose I/O
general purpose open-collector
Graphics address re-mapping table
graphics user interface
hexadecimal
HW
hardware
hex
hexadecimal
Hz
hertz
ICH
I/O controller hub
IDE
IEEE
IF
integrated drive element
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
interrupt flag
I/F
interface
in
inch
INT
interrupt
I/O
input/output
IPL
initial program loader
InfraRed Data Association
interrupt request
industry standard architecture
Joint Electron Device Engineering Council
kilobits / kilobytes (x 1024 bits / x 1024 bytes)
kilobits per second
IrDA
IRQ
ISA
JEDEC
Kb / KB
Kb/s
kg
kilogram
KHz
kv
kilohertz
kilovolt
Continued
1-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table 1-1. Acronyms and Abbreviations Continued
Acronym/Abbreviation
Description
lb
pound
LAN
local area network
LCD
liquid crystal display
LED
light-emitting diode
LIF
LPC
low insertion force (socket)
Low pin count
LSI
LSb / LSB
LUN
large scale integration
least significant bit / least significant byte
logical unit (SCSI)
MCH
MMX
MPEG
ms
Memory controller hub
multimedia extensions
Motion Picture Experts Group
millisecond
MSb / MSB
mux
most significant bit / most significant byte
multiplex
MVA
MVW
n
motion video acceleration
motion video window
variable parameter/value
network interface card/controller
nickel cadmium
NIC
NiCad
NiMH
NMI
NRZI
ns
nickel-metal hydride
non-maskable interrupt
Non-return-to-zero inverted
nanosecond
NT
nested task flag
NTSC
NVRAM
OEM
OS
National Television Standards Committee
non-volatile random access memory
original equipment manufacturer
operating system
PAL
PC
1. programmable array logic 2. phase altering line
Internet Device
PCI
peripheral component interconnect
pulse code modulation
Internet Device Memory Card International Association
parity flag
PCM
PCMCIA
PF
PIN
PIO
personal identification number
Programmed I/O
POST
PROM
PTR
power-on self test
programmable read-only memory
pointer
RAM
RAS
rcvr
random access memory
row address strobe
receiver
RF
resume flag
RGB
RH
red/green/blue (monitor input)
Relative humidity
RIMM
RMS
ROM
RPM
RTC
RDRAM inline memory module
root mean square
read-only memory
revolutions per minute
real time clock
R/W
read/write
Continued
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 1-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table 1-1. Acronyms and Abbreviations Continued
Acronym/Abbreviation
SCSI
SDRAM
SEC
Description
small computer system interface
Synchronous Dynamic RAM
Single Edge-Connector
SECAM
SF
sequential colour avec memoire (sequential color with memory)
sign flag
SGRAM
SIMD
SIMM
SIT
SMART
SMI
SMM
SMRAM
SPD
SPP
SRAM
SSE
STN
SVGA
SW
Synchronous Graphics RAM
Single instruction multiple data
single in-line memory module
system information table
Self Monitor Analysis Report Technology
system management interrupt
system management mode
system management RAM
serial presence detect
standard parallel port
static RAM
Streaming SIMD extensions
super twist pneumatic
super VGA
software
TAD
TAFI
TAM
TCP
TF
telephone answering device
Temperature-sensing And Fan control Integrated circuit
telephone answering machine
tape carrier package
trap flag
TFT
thin-film transistor
TIA
TPE
Telecommunications Information Administration
twisted pair ethernet
TPI
track per inch
TTL
TV
transistor-transistor logic
television
TX
transmit
UART
UDMA
URL
us / µs
USB
universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
Ultra DMA
Uniform resource locator
microsecond
Universal Serial Bus
UTP
V
unshielded twisted pair
volt
VESA
VGA
vib
Video Electronic Standards Association
video graphics adapter
vibrato
VLSI
VRAM
W
very large scale integration
Video RAM
watt
WOL
WRAM
ZF
Wake on LAN
Windows RAM
zero flag
ZIF
zero insertion force (socket)
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 1-7
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.1
INTRODUCTION
The Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices provides affordable business solutions with the
focus on internet access and mainstream performance. Based on an Intel Celeron or Pentium III
processor with the Intel 810e chipset, these systems are designed to maximize the effectiveness of
internet and intranet usage while simplifying system management.
Figure 2–1. Compaq iPAQ Internet Device with Monitor
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Features and options (2.2)
Mechanical design (2.3)
System architecture (2.4)
Specifications (2.5)
page 2-2
page 2-4
page 2-8
page 2-13
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.2
FEATURES AND OPTIONS
This section describes the standard features and available options.
2.2.1 STANDARD FEATURES
The following standard features are available on all models:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Celeron or Pentium III processor
810e Chipset
Two DIMM sockets for system memory
AC’97 audio subsystem w/Compaq Premier Sound and front panel mic and headphone jacks
MuliBay device mount w/hot-swap support
Extended IDE controller supporting UATA/66 mode
Hard drive fault prediction
Two USB ports on front panel
Network interface controller
VGA analog output (1600 x 1200 max resolution)
APM 1.2 power management support
Plug ’n Play compatible (with ESCD support)
Intelligent Manageability support
Energy Star compliant
Security features including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setup and power-on passwords
DriveLock for MultiBay hard drive
I/O interface disabling
Administrator password
Network service boot
Asset tracking tag
UUID
Cable lock provision
♦
♦
Compaq Easy-Access keyboard w/Windows support
Mouse
Table 2-1 shows the differences in features between the iPAQ models:
Table 2-1.
iPAQ Feature Difference Matrix
Legacy-Free
Legacy-Light
Celeron-Based
Pentium-based
Celeron-Based
Pentium-Based
4-MB Display cache
Rear panel USB ports
Serial port
No
3
0
Yes
3
0
No
0
1
Yes
0
1
Parallel port
0
0
1
1
Keyboard/mouse connection
USB
USB
PS/2
PS/2
2-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
2.2.2 OPTIONS
The following items are available as options for all models and may be included in the standard
configuration of some models:
♦
System Memory:
32-MB DIMM (non-ECC)
64-MB DIMM (non-ECC)
128-MB DIMM (non-ECC)
256-MB DIMM (non-ECC)
♦
♦
Hard drives:
4.3 or 8.4 GB UATA/66 hard drive
MultiBay drives:
24x CD-ROM drive
4x DVD-ROM drive
Super Disk LS-120 Power Drive
6.0 GB hard drive
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.3
MECHANICAL DESIGN
The Compaq iPAQ Internet Device uses a minitower form factor featuring a smaller footprint
and reduced height than previous minitowers, allowing easy floor or desktop positioning.
Commonly used audio and USB connections are accessible from the front panel. There are slight
differences between the legacy-light and legacy-free models, most notably in the rear panel
layouts.
NOTE: For detailed information on servicing the Internet Device refer to the applicable
Maintenance and Service Guide.
2.3.1 CABINET LAYOUTS
2.3.1.1 Front View
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
Item
1
Description
Power Button
2
Power LED
3
Hard drive activity LED
4
5
MultiBay device bay (accepts 5.25”/12.7 mm storage device)
Microphone In Jack
6
Headphone Out Jack
7
USB port 3 jack
8
USB port 4 jack
Figure 2–2. Compaq iPAQ Internet Device, Front View
2-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
2.3.1.2 Rear Views
2
4
2
4
6
1
1
3
5
3
5
6
8
7
10
10
9
12
14
11
13
13
14
Legacy-Light
Legacy-Free
Item
1
3
5
7
Description
Audio line output
Network activity LED indicator
Network speed LED indicator
Parallel I/F connector
Item
2
4
6
8
Description
Audio line input
Network I/F jack
VGA monitor connector
Serial I/F connector
9
11
13
USB port connectors (left-to-right; 0,1, 2)
PS/2 mouse connector
AC line in connector
10
12
14
MultiBay device eject button
PS/2 keyboard connector
Line voltage select switch
Figure 2–3. Compaq iPAQ Internet Device, Rear Views
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.3.2 CHASSIS LAYOUT
The internal assemblies are accessible from the right side of the system unit. The right side
(carbon-colored) cover is easily removable allowing quick access to the DIMM sockets through
an access opening and to the hard drive. Access to the system board and processor requires
removing the right chassis access panel.
NOTE: For a detailed description on servicing the unit refer to the applicable
Maintenance and Service Guide.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Right Side Cover Removed
Right Side Cover and
Chassis Access Panel Removed
Item
1
2
Description
Power button/LED board (PCA# 010647)
DIMM socket access
3
4
5
6
Hard drive in 3.5” 1/3 height bay
Audio I/O board (PCA# 010650)
System board (PCA# 161014 or 161015)
Power supply assembly
Processor
7
8
Speaker
Figure 2–4. Compaq iPAQ Internet Device Chassis Layout, Ride Side View
2-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
2.3.3 SYSTEM BOARD LAYOUTS
The Compaq iPAQ Internet Device uses a FlexATX-type (9.0 x 7.5 inch) system board. Two
variations are available; a legacy-light board and a legacy-free board.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
22
21
20
22
21
20
6
6
7
8
7
8
9
9
19
19
10
11
12
13
18
18
17
16
15
17
16
15
14
Legacy Light (PCA# 161014)
Legacy Free (PCA# 161015)
Item
1
2
Description
USB ports 3 and 4 (front panel) header
Battery
3
4
BIOS ROM configuration jumper
Speaker connector
5
6
Audio microphone/headphone header
Audio line out jack
7
Audio line in jack
8
Network connector
9
VGA monitor connector
Parallel I/F connector
Serial I/F connector
USB ports 0, 1, 2 connectors
PS/2 mouse connector (top), PS/2 keyboard connector (bottom)
Serial I/F header
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
PGA370 processor socket
DIMM sockets
Processor (boxed) fan header
IDE (primary) 40-pin connector
IDE (secondary) 50-pin connector
Power button/LED indicator connector
CD audio header
Power supply connector
NOTE:
Refer to Chapter 7 “Power and Signal Distribution” for header pinouts.
Figure 2–5. Compaq iPAQ System Board Layouts
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-7
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.4
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The Compaq iPAQ Internet Device features an Intel Celeron or Pentium III processor and the
810e chipset. As indicated in the following table and shown in Figure 2-6, four architectural
configurations are available:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Legacy-free with Celeron processor
Legacy-free with Pentium III processor
Legacy-light with Celeron processor
Legacy-light with Pentium III processor
Legacy-free systems provide five Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for connecting peripherals
(including the supplied USB mouse and USB keyboard). Legacy light systems provide two USB
ports along with the traditional PS/2 connectors for the supplied mouse and keyboard as well as
parallel and serial port connectors.
All systems use the 810e chipset. The 810e chipset includes the 82810e-DC100 GMCH designed
to provide control for SDRAM and also integrates an AGP 2X graphics controller. Pentium III-
based systems come with an additional 4-MB display cache to compliment the graphics
controller.
The 810e chipset also includes an 82801 I/O Controller Hub (ICH) that provides two IDE
interfaces, two USB interfaces, and a PCI bus controller. The 82802 Firmware Hub (FWH)
component is loaded with Compaq BIOS
Table 2-1 lists differences between system architectures:
Table 2-2.
Architectural Comparison
Legacy Free
Legacy Light
Celeron-Based
Pentium III-Based Celeron-Based Pentium III-Based
Host bus (FSB)speed [1]
4-MB Display Cache?
PS/2 Mouse/Keyboard?
Serial port?
Parallel port?
# of USB ports
66 MHz
No
No
No
No
100 MHz
Yes
No
66 MHz
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
100 MHz
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
5
5
2
NOTES:
[1] As configured with 500-MHz processor.
2-8 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Celeron or
Pentium III
Processor
66-/100-/133- MHz FSB
810e Chipset
Monitor
PC100
Memory
Bus
82810e-DC100
GMCH
RGB
AGP
2X
Cntlr.
SDRAM
System
Memory
SDRAM
Cntlr.
4-MB
Display Cache
Hub Link
Bus
USB Hub
USB
Port 0
USB
Port 1
USB
Port 2
USB
Port 3
USB
Port 4
USB
I/F
Pri.
IDE I/F
IDE
Hard Drive
82801
ICH
Sec.
MultiBay
Device
IDE I/F
LPC
Bus
Keyboard/
Mouse I/F
LPC47B277 I/O Controller
82802
FWH
Serial
I/F
Parallel
I/F
Beep
Audio
33-MHz
32-Bit PCI Bus
Audio
Subsystem
AC’97
Audio Bus
82559
Ethernet
Controller
Power
Supply
..................
LEGEND:
Legacy-light systems only.
Legacy-free systems only.
Pentium III-based systems only.
Figure 2–6. Compaq iPAQ Architecture, Block diagram
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-9
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.4.1 PROCESSORS
The Compaq iPAQ family includes models based on Celeron and Pentium III processors. These
processors are backward-compatible with software written for the Pentium II, Pentium MMX,
Pentium Pro, Pentium, and x86 microprocessors. Both processor architectures include a floating-
point unit and first and secondary caches providing enhanced performance for multimedia
applications.
2.4.1.1 Celeron Processor
Select Compaq iPAQ systems use the Intel Celeron processor. The Celeron processor provides
economical performance and is compatible with software written for previous generation
processors such as Pentium II, Pentium MMX, Pentium, and x86 processors. Featuring a
Pentium-type core architecture, the Celeron processor integrates a dual-ALU CPU with a
floating-point unit, 32-KB first-level cache, and 128-KB second level cache, all of which operate
at full processing (CPU) speed. The Celeron processor includes MMX technology for enhanced
multimedia performance.
The Celeron processor uses a PGA370 package with a heat sink.
2.4.1.2 Pentium III Processor
The Intel Pentium III processor used on select systems represents the maximum performance
processor for Compaq iPAQs. The Pentium III processor is compatible with software written for
Celeron, Pentium II, Pentium MMX, Pentium, and x86 processors.
The Pentium III processor core integrates a dual-ALU CPU with a floating-point unit and 32-KB
first-level cache operating at processing (CPU) speed. Featuring .18-micron technology, the
Pentium III processor features 256 kilobytes of secondary cache included on the CPU die and
operating at full processor speed.
The Pentium III processor includes MMX technology for enhanced multimedia performance.
Also included are 70 additional streaming SIMD extensions (SSE) for enhancing 3D graphics
and speech processing performance and a serial number function useful for asset tracking.
The Pentium III processor employed in these systems uses a Flip-Chip (FC) PGA370 package
and heat sink.
2-10 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
2.4.1.3 Processor Upgrading
All models of the Compaq iPAQ use the PGA370 zero-insertion force (ZIF) socket for processor
mounting as shown in Figure 2-7. Raising the Lock/Unlock handle of the socket in the vertical
position allows the processor to be removed or inserted into the socket. Lowering the
Lock/Unlock handle in the down (horizontal) position locks the processor in place. Factory
configurations use processors fitted with passive heat sinks. Upgrade (boxed) processors may be
fitted with a heat sink/fan assembly with a power cable that attaches to the fan power header
provided on the system board.
Heat Sink
Heat Sink
Retaining Clip
Processor
Lock/Unlock
Handle
PPGA370
Socket
Figure 2–7. Processor Assembly and Mounting
The processor clock frequency is automatically set by chipset logic, eliminating the need for
setting DIP switches when upgrading the processor.
WARNING: The system board is designed handle a maximum processor current load
of 18 amps. Installing a replacement processor that draws more than 18 amps of current
may damage the processor and/or the system board.
!
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-11
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.4.2 CHIPSET
The Compaq iPAQ employs the Intel 810e chipset, which is designed to compliment the
processor and provide the central point for the system’s data transactions.
The chipset is composed of a graphics memory controller hub (GMCH), an I/O controller hub
(ICH), and a firmware hub (FWH). Table 2-3 shows the functions provided by the components of
the chipset.
Table 2-3.
Intel 810e Chipset Components
Component Type
Function
82810e-DC100 Graphics/Memory
Controller Hub(GMCH)
AGP 2X graphics controller (i740 equivalent)
SDRAM controller supporting 2 PC100 DIMMs
66-/100-/133-MHz FSB
PCI bus I/F
82801AA I/O Controller Hub (ICH)
LPC bus I/F
SMBus I/F
IDE I/F with UATA/66 support
AC ’97 audio controller
RTC/CMOS
IRQ controller
Power management logic
USB I/F (2)
82802 Firmware Controller Hub (FWH)
Loaded with Compaq BIOS
Random number generator
2-12 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
2.4.3 SUPPORT COMPONENTS
Input/output functions not provided by the chipset are handled by other support components.
Some of these components also provide “housekeeping” and various other functions as well.
Table 2-4 shows the functions provided by the support components.
Table 2-4.
Support Component Functions
Component Name
LPC47B277 I/O Controller
Function
Keyboard and pointing device I/F
Diskette I/F
Notes
[1]
[2]
Serial I/F
[1]
Parallel I/F
[1]
AGP, PCI reset generation
ISA serial IRQ converter
Power button logic
Slow speed detection
S3 regulator controller
GPIO ports
AD1881 Audio Codec
Audio mixer
Digital-to-analog converter
Analog-to-digital converter
Analog I/O:
Mic input
Line input
CD input
Line output
82559 Ethernet Controller [1]
NOTE:
Network interface controller
PHY interface
[1] Implemented on legacy-light models only.
[2] Not available for actual use but may be enabled to satisfy OS requirements.
2.4.4 SYSTEM MEMORY
These systems utilize Synchronous DRAM (PC100 SDRAM, non-ECC only). Two DIMM
sockets are provided and accessible through an access opening once the right side cover has been
removed.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-13
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
2.4.5 MASS STORAGE
In a standard configuration the Compaq iPAQ supports two mass storage devices; one internal
IDE hard drive mounted on the right side and a removeable-media IDE device (CD-ROM, DVD,
or LS-120 Power Drive, etc.) mounted in the MultiBay on the left side. This system uses SMART
drives for the internal IDE device. An adapter is available that allows a secondary IDE hard drive
to be installed in the MultiBay. The MultiBay supports hot-swapping of mass storage devices
except for hard drives. The Compaq iPAQ supports the DriveLock feature for MultiBay hard
drives, providing enhanced security for removeable hard drives.
2.4.6 SERIAL AND PARALLEL INTERFACES
The legacy-light models include a serial port and a parallel port accessible at the rear of the
chassis. The serial port is RS-232-C/16550-compatible and supports standard baud rates up to
115,200 as well as two high-speed baud rates of 230K and 460K , and utilize a DB-9 connector.
The parallel interface is Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP1.9) and Enhanced Capability Port (ECP)
compatible, and supports bi-directional data transfers through a DB-25 connector. These
interfaces may be disabled through Setup for enhanced security
2.4.7 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS INTERFACE
Legacy-light models feature two front panel-accessible Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports that
provide a 12Mb/s interface for peripherals. Legacy-free models also include three additional USB
ports on the rear panel to accommodate the USB keyboard and mouse supplied with those
models. The USB provides hot plugging/unplugging (Plug ’n Play) functionality.
2.4.8 GRAPHICS SUBSYSTEM
All models use the graphics controller integrated into the 82810e/DC-100 GMCH component of
the 810e chipset. This graphics controller is the equivalent of the Intel i740 controller and
provides up to 1600 x 1200 2D resolution using the AGP 2X interface. Pentium III-based systems
also include 4 megabytes of local display cache for higher 3D performance.
2-14 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
2.4.9 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM
The audio subsystem features an AC’97 specification-based design and uses the integrated AC97
audio controller of the chipset and an AC’97-compliant audio codec. Microphone and
headphone jacks are accessible on the front panel and line input and output jacks are provided on
the rear panel. A low-distortion 5-watt amplifier drives a long-excursion speaker for optimum
sound.
2.5
SPECIFICATIONS
This section includes the environmental, electrical, and physical specifications for the Compaq
iPAQ Series Internet Devices. Where provided, metric statistics are given in parenthesis. All
specifications subject to change without notice.
Table 2-5.
Environmental Specifications
Parameter
Air Temperature
Shock
Vibration
Humidity
Operating
50o to 95o F (10o to 35o C)
N/A
Nonoperating
-24o to 140o F (-30o to 60o C)
60.0 g for 2 ms half-sine pulse
0.0005g^ 2/Hz, 10-500 Hz [1]
95% RH @ 36o C
0.000215g^ 2/Hz, 10-300 Hz [1]
90% RH @ 36o C (no hard drive)
10,000 ft (3048 m)
Maximum Altitude
30,000 ft (9,144 m)
NOTE:
[1] 0.5 grms nominal
Table 2-6.
Electrical Specifications
Parameter
U.S.
International
Input Line Voltage:
Nominal:
Maximum:
110 - 120 VAC
90 - 132 VAC
200 - 240 VAC
180 - 264 VAC
Input Line Frequency Range:
Nominal:
Maximum:
50 - 60 Hz
47 - 63 Hz
50 - 60 Hz
47 - 63 Hz
Power Supply:
Maximum Continuous Power
Maximum Line Current Draw
90 watts
2.5 amps
90 watts
1.25 amps
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-15
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
Table 2-7.
Physical Specifications
Parameter
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Standard
11.80 in
5.66 in
9.44 in
10.7 lb
Metric
29.97 cm
14.38 cm
23.98 cm
4.8 kg
Table 2-8.
MultiBay 24x CD-ROM Drive Specifications
(SP# 161685-B21)
Parameter
Measurement
Interface Type / Protocol
Transfer Rate:
Max. Sustained
Burst
IDE / ATAPI
3.6 MB/s
16.6 MB/s
Media Type
Mode 1,2, Mixed Mode, CD-DA,
Photo CD, Cdi, CD-XA
Capacity:
Mode 1, 12 cm
Mode 2, 12 cm
8 cm
Center Hole Diameter
Disc Diameter
Disc Thickness
Track Pitch
550 MB
640 MB
180 MB
15 mm
8/12 cm
1.2 mm
1.6 um
Laser
Beam Divergence
Output Power
Type
53.5 +/- 1.5 °
53.6 0.14 mW
GaAs
Wave Length
Average Access Time:
Random
Full Stroke
Audio Output Level
Cache Buffer
790 +/- 25 nm
140 ms
300 ms
0.7 Vrms
128 KB
2-16 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table 2-9.
MultiBay 4x DVD-ROM Drive Specifications
(SP# 161685-B21)
Parameter
Measurement
Interface Type / Protocol
Transfer Rate:
IDE / ATAPI
Max. Sustained (off disk)
Data Bus Burst
5.41 MB/s
16.6 MB/s
Media Types
DVD (single/double layer),
DVD-5, DVD-9, DVD-10,
CD-ROM Modes 1 or 2, CD-DA,
Photo CD, Cdi, CD-XA
Capacity:
Mode 1, 12 cm
Mode 2, 12 cm
8 cm
Center Hole Diameter
Disc Diameter
Disc Thickness
Track Pitch
Average Access Time:
DVD:
550 MB
640 MB
180 MB
15 mm
8 or 12 cm
1.2 mm
1.6 um
Random
Full Stroke
<170 ms
<280 ms
CD:
Random
Full stroke
Audio Output Level
Cache Buffer
<130 ms
<225 ms
0.7 Vrms
512 KB
Table 2-10.
Hard Drive Specifications
Parameter
P/N
Interface / Protocol Type
Drive Type
4.3 GB
158738
IDE / UATA-4
65
6.0 GB [1]
8.4 GB
158739
IDE / UATA-4
65
161684
IDE / UATA-4
65
Drive Size
3.5/5.25 in
66.6 MB/s
2.5/5.25 in
66.6 MB/s
5.25 in
66.6 MB/s
Interface Transfer Rate (max.)
Max. Seek Time (w/settling)
Single Track
2.0 ms
9.5 ms
19.0 ms
4.0 ms
12.0 ms
23.0 ms
4.75 ms
14.9 ms
27 ms
Average
Full Stroke (max)
Disk Format (logical):
# of Cylinders
# of Data Heads
# of Sectors per Track
Rotation Speed
Drive Fault Prediction
8419
15
63
5400 RPM
SMART II
13424
15
63
4200 RPM
SMART II
16383
16
63
5400 RPM
SMART III
NOTE:
[1] For use in MultiBay.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 2-17
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 System Overview
This page is intentionally blank.
2-18 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 3
PROCESSOR/
MEMORY SUBSYSTEM
3.1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the processor/cache memory subsystem of the Compaq iPAQ Internet
Device featuring a Celeron or Pentium III processor and the 810e chipset (Figure 3-1). The 810e
chipset supports up to two SDRAM DIMMs and integrates an i740 3D graphics controller
(covered in Chapter 6).
System Memory
J2
J1
Processor
32-MB
DIMM
In
Socket
64-Bit FSB
Socket
Cntl
FSB I/F
100-MHz
Memory Bus
i740
Graphics
Cntlr.
82810e-DC100
GMCH
SDRAM
Cntlr.
Hub I/F
May be populated with optional DIMM
Covered in Chapter 6
Covered in Chapter 4
Figure 3–1. Processor/Memory Subsystem Architecture
This chapter includes the following topics:
♦
♦
♦
Processor [3.2]
Memory subsystem [3.3]
Subsystem configuration {3.4] page 3-8
page 3-2
page 3-5
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 3-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Processor/Memory Subsystem
3.2
PROCESSOR
The Compaq iPAQ is configured as either a Celeron-based or Pentium III-based system.
3.2.1 CELERON PROCESSOR
The Celeron processor (Figure 3-2) uses a dual-ALU CPU with branch prediction and MMX
support, floating point unit (FPU) for math coprocessing, a 32-KB primary (L1) cache, and a
128-KB secondary (L2) cache. All internal functions, except for the front side bus interface (FSB
I/F), operate at processor speed.
Celeron Processor
FPU
32-KB
L1
128-KB
L2
CPU
Cache
Cache
FSB
I/F
Core processing speed
Host bus speed
Figure 3–2. Celeron Processor Internal Architecture
The Celeron processor is software-compatible with earlier generation Pentium II, Pentium MMX,
Pentium, and x86 processors. The MMX support provided by the Celeron consists of 57 special
instructions for accelerating multimedia communications applications. Such applications often
involve computing-intensive loops that can take up as much as 90 percent of the CPU’s execution
time. Using a parallel-processing technique called single-instruction multiple-data (SIMD),
MMX logic processes data 64 bits at a time. Specific applications that can benefit from MMX
technology include 2D/3D graphics, audio, speech recognition, video codecs, and data
compression.
The Celeron-based systems ship with a Celeron 500 installed. The 82810-DC100 GMCH
supports the processors listed in the following table:
Table 3-1.
Celeron Processor Statistical Comparison
Core/L1/L2
FSB
Freq.
66 MHz
66 MHz
Core
Voltage
2.0 v
Power
Consumption
Na
Processor
Celeron 500
Celeron 533
Freq.
500 MHz
533 MHz
2.0 v
Na
3-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
3.2.2 PENTIUM III PROCESSOR
The Pentium III processor’s architecture (Figure 3-3) includes the same core functionality as
described previously for the Celeron processor but includes a larger L2 cache and additional
processing features.
Pentium III 500E
FPU
32-KB
L1
256-KB
L2
CPU
Cache
Cache
FSB
I/F
Full processing speed
Host bus speed
Figure 3–3. Pentium III Processor Internal Architecture
Table 3-2.
Pentium III Processor Statistical Comparison
CPU/L1
L2
Core
FSB
Processor
Speed
Size / Speed
Voltage
Speed
Pentium III 500E
Pentium III 533
Pentium III 533B
Pentium III 533EB
Pentium III 550
Pentium III 550E
Pentium III 600
Pentium III 600B
Pentium III 600E
Pentium III 600EB
Pentium III 667
Pentium III 700
Pentium III 733
500 MHz
533 MHz
533 MHz
533 MHz
550 MHz
550 MHz
600 MHz
600 MHz
600 MHz
600 MHz
667 MHz
700 MHz
733 MHz
256 KB @ 500 MHz
512 KB @ 266 MHz
512 KB @ 266 MHz
256 KB @ 533 MHz
512 KB @ 275 MHz
256 KB @ 550 MHz
512 KB @ 300 MHz
512 KB @ 300 MHz
256 KB @ 600 MHz
256 KB @ 600 MHz
256 KB @ 667 MHz
256 KB @ 700 MHz
256 KB @ 733 MHz
1.60 VDC
2.00 VDC
2.05 VDC
1.65 VDC
2.00 VDC
1.60 VDC
2.05 VDC
2.05 VDC
1.65 VDC
1.65 VDC
1.65 VDC
1.65 VDC
1.65 VDC
100 MHz
100 MHz
133 MHz
133 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
133 MHz
100 MHz
133 MHz
133 MHz
100 MHz
133 MHz
The Pentium III processor is software-compatible with Celeron, Pentium II, Pentium MMX,
Pentium, and x86 processors. The Pentium III processor also features 70 FPU-based streaming
SIMD extensions (SSE) that, when implemented by appropriate software, can enhance 3D
transforming and speech processing operations. Operating system requirements for SSE support
are as follows:
Operating System
Windows 95
Level of SSE Support
No SSE support
Windows 98, OSR0
Windows 98, OSR1
Windows 2000
SSE support though ISV and OpenGL 6.1 applications only
SSE support though ISV, OpenGL, and DirectX applications
SSE support with ISV, OpenGL, and DirectX applications
SSE support requires driver and Service Pack 4 (SP5 recommended)
Windows NT 4.0
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 3-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Processor/Memory Subsystem
3.2.3 PROCESSOR UPGRADING
All units use the PGA370 ZIF mounting socket and ship with either a Celeron 500E or a Pentium
III 500E installed. To replace the processor, use the following procedure:
1. Power down the system and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the right outer (carbon) panel.
3. Disconnect and remove the hard drive.
4. Remove the right chassis access panel.
5. After insuring that you have been properly grounded, remove the heatsink retaining clip and
then the heatsink itself.
6. Lift the release arm of the PGA370 socket to the upright position.
7. Lift the processor package from the socket.
Replacement of the new processor is a reversal of steps 1-7. The use of “boxed” processors may
also require the connection of a power cable from the processor’s heatsink-mounted fan to a
header on the system board. When replacing the processor it is recommended that the
replacement processor be of the same family as the existing processor (i.e., Celeron for Celeron,
or Pentium for Pentium).
WARNING: Upgrading to a faster processor is possible provided that the new
processor does not draw more than 18 amps of current. Using a processor that
draws in excess of 18 amps may create a thermal condition and damage the system
board
!
The processor core voltage and operating frequency are automatically set early in power cycle
process. No DIP switch settings are involved in replacing the processor.
3-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
3.3
MEMORY SUBSYSTEM
The 810e chipset supports PC100 SDRAM for system memory. The memory interface consists of
a 64-bit data bus operating at 100 MHz providing a maximum throughput rate of 800 MB/s. The
system board provides two 168-pin SDRAM DIMM sockets that accommodate single- or double-
sided DIMMs. This system is designed for using non-ECC DIMMs only.
If using memory modules from third party suppliers the following DIMM type is recommended:
100-MHz unbuffered RAM supporting CAS latency (CL) 2 or 3 with a data access time
(clock-to-data out) of 9.0 ns or less @ CL=2 or CL=3.
NOTE: The 82810/82810e GMCH performs memory accesses at 100 MHz regardless of
the FSB frequency.
The RAM type and operating parameters are detected during POST by the system BIOS using the
serial presence detect (SPD) method. This method employs an I2C bus to communicate with an
EEPROM on each installed DIMM. The EEPROM holds the type and operating parameter data.
The supported format complies with the JEDEC specification for 128-byte EEPROMs. This
system also provides support for 256-byte EEPROMs to include additional Compaq-added
features such as part number and serial number. The SPD format as supported in this system is
shown in Table 3-3.
The key SPD bytes that BIOS checks for compatibility are 2, 9, 10, 18, 23, and 24. If BIOS
detects EDO DIMMs a “memory incompatible” message will be displayed and the system
will halt. If ECC DIMMs are used, all DIMMs installed must be ECC for ECC benefits (error
logging) to be realized.
Once BIOS determines the DIMM type the DRAM speed and CAS latency is checked based on
the following criteria:
Access
from
Bus Speed
100 MHz
Cycle Time
10 ns
Clock
6 ns @ 50 pf loading
NOTE: Refer to chapter 8 for a description of the BIOS procedure of interrogating
DIMMs.
Only CAS latencies of 2 or 3 are supported. If DIMMs with unequal CAS latencies are installed
then operation will occur based on the DIMM with the greatest latency.
If an incompatible DIMM is detected the NUM LOCK will blink for a short period of time during
POST and an error message may or may not be displayed before the system hangs.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 3-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Processor/Memory Subsystem
The SPD address map is shown below.
Table 3-3.
SPD Address Map (SDRAM DIMM)
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
6, 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Description
Notes
[1]
[2]
Byte
27
28
Description
Notes
[7]
[7]
No. of Bytes Written Into EEPROM
Total Bytes (#) In EEPROM
Memory Type
No. of Row Addresses On DIMM
No. of Column Addresses On DIMM
No. of Module Banks On DIMM
Data Width of Module
Voltage Interface Standard of DIMM
Cycletime @ Max CAS Latency (CL)
Access From Clock
Config. Type (Parity, Nonparity, etc.)
Refresh Rate/Type
Width, Primary DRAM
Error Checking Data Width
Min. Clock Delay
Burst Lengths Supported
No. of Banks For Each Mem. Device
CAS Latencies Supported
CS# Latency
Min. Row Prechge. Time
Min. Row Active to Delay
Min. RAS to CAS Delay
Reserved
Superset Data
SPD Revision
Checksum Bytes 0-62
JEP-106E ID Code
DIMM OEM Location
OEM’s Part Number
OEM’s Rev. Code
Manufacture Date
OEM’s Assembly S/N
OEM Specific Data
Reserved
Compaq header “CPQ1”
Header checksum
Unit serial number
DIMM ID
29
[7]
[3]
30, 31
32..61
62
63
64-71
72
73-90
91, 92
93, 94
95-98
99-125
126, 127
128-131
132
[7]
[7]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[4]
[4]
[4] [5]
[6]
[9]
[9]
[9] [10]
[9] [11]
[9]
[4]
[4]
[4]
[4]
133-145
146
147
Write Latency
DIMM Attributes
Checksum
Reserved
148-255
[9]
Memory Device Attributes
Min. CLK Cycle Time at CL X-1
Max. Acc. Time From CLK @ CL X-1
Min. CLK Cycle Time at CL X-2
Max. Acc. Time From CLK @ CL X-2
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
NOTES:
[1] Programmed as 128 bytes by the DIMM OEM
[2] Must be programmed to 256 bytes.
[3] High order bit defines redundant addressing: if set (1), highest order RAS# address must be
re-sent as highest order CAS# address.
[4] Refer to memory manufacturer’s datasheet
[5] MSb is Self Refresh flag. If set (1), assembly supports self refresh.
[6] Back-to-back random column addresses.
[7] Field format proposed to JEDEC but not defined as standard at publication time.
[8] Field specified as optional by JEDEC but required by this system.
[9] Compaq usage. This system requires that the DIMM EEPROM have this
space available for reads/writes.
[10] Serial # in ASCII format (MSB is 133). Intended as backup identifier in case vender data is invalid.
Can also be used to indicate s/n mismatch and flag system adminstrator of possible system
Tampering.
[11] Contains the socket # of the module (first module is “1”). Intended as backup identifier (refer to
note [10]).
3-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Figure 3-4 shows the system memory map.
4 GB
FFFF FFFFh
FFE0 0000h
FFDF FFFFh
High BIOS Area
(2 MB)
PCI Memory
(18 MB)
FEC1 0000h
FEC0 FFFFh
APIC Config. Space
(64 KB)
FEC0 0000h
FEBF FFFFh
Host,
PCI, AGP Area
PCI Memory
Expansion
(2548 MB)
4000 0000h
3FFF FFFFh
1 GB
Host/PCI Memory
Expansion
(1008 MB)
0100 0000h
00FF FFFFh
16 MB
1 MB
Host, PCI,
ISA Area
Extended Memory
(15 MB)
0010 0000h
000F FFFFh
System BIOS Area
(64 KB)
000F 0000h
000E FFFFh
Extended BIOS Area
(64 KB)
000E 0000h
000D FFFFh
Option ROM
(128 KB)
000C 0000h
000B FFFFh
Graphics/SMRAM
RAM (128 KB)
DOS Compatibility
Area
000A 0000h
0009 FFFFh
640 KB
512 KB
Fixed Mem. Area
(128 KB)
0008 0000h
0007 FFFFh
Base Memory
(512 KB)
0000 0000h
NOTE: All locations in memory are cacheable. Base memory is always mapped to DRAM. The next 128 KB fixed
memory area can, through the north bridge, be mapped to DRAM or to PCI space. Graphics RAM area is mapped
to PCI or AGP locations.
Figure 3–4. System Memory Map
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 3-7
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Processor/Memory Subsystem
3.4
SUBSYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The 82810e-DC100 GMCH component provides the configuration function for the
processor/memory subsystem. Table 3-4 lists the configuration registers used for setting and
checking such parameters as memory control and PCI bus operation. These registers reside in the
PCI Configuration Space and accessed using the methods described in Chapter 4, section 4.2.
Table 3-4.
Host/PCI Bridge Configuration Registers (GMCH, Function 0)
PCI Config.
Addr.
00, 01h
02, 03h
04, 05h
06, 07h
08h
Reset
Value
8086h
7190h
0006h
0210h
--
PCI Config.
Addr.
6A, 6Bh
6C..6Fh
70h
Reset
Value
00h
55h
00h
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
Command
Status
Revision ID
Register
DRAM Control Reg.
Memory Buffer Strength
Multi-Transaction Timer
CPU Latency Timer
SMRAM Control
71h
72h
10h
02h
09..0Bh
0Dh
0Eh
10..13h
50, 51h
53h
55..56h
57h
Class Code
Latency Timer
Header Type
--
00h
00h
8
00h
83h
00h
01h
00h
00h
01h
00h
90h
91h
92h
93h
A0..A3h
A4..A7h
A8..ABh
B0..B3h
B4h
B8..BBh
BCh
BDh
Error Command
00h
00h
00h
00h
N/A
N/A
00h
00h
Error Status Register 0
Error Status Register 1
Reset Control
AGP Capability Identifier
AGP Status
AGP Command
AGP Control
Aperture Size
Aperture Base Config.
PAC Config. Reg.
Data Buffer Control
DRAM Row Type
DRAM Control
DRAM Timing
PAM 0..6 Registers
DRAM Row Boundary
Fixed DRAM Hole
58h
0000h
0000h
00h
59..5Fh
60..67h
68h
Aperture Translation Table
Aperture I/F Timer
Low Priority Timer
00h
NOTES:
Refer to Intel Inc. documentation for detailed description of registers.
Assume unmarked locations/gaps as reserved.
3-8 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 4
SYSTEM SUPPORT
4.1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers subjects dealing with basic system architecture and support functions. Topics
covered are:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
PCI bus overview (4.2)
AGP bus overview (4.3)
Interrupts (4.4)
Interval timer (4.5)
System clock distribution (4.6)
Real-time clock and configuration memory (4.7) page 4-17
System management (4.8)
System I/O map (4.9)
page 4-2
page 4-10
page 4-13
page 4-16
page 4-16
page 4-27
page 4-29
This chapter covers functions provided by off-the-shelf chipsets and therefore describes only basic
aspects of these functions as well as information unique to Compaq iPAQ Internet Devices. For
detailed information on specific components, refer to the applicable manufacturer’s
documentation.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
4.2
PCI BUS OVERVIEW
NOTE: This section describes the PCI bus in general and highlights bus
implementation in this particular system. For detailed information regarding PCI bus
operation, refer to the PCI Local Bus Specification Revision 2.2.
This system implements a 32-bit Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus (spec. 2.2)
operating at 33 MHz. The PCI bus handles address/data transfers through the identification of
devices and functions on the bus. A device is typically defined as a component that resides on the
PCI bus (although some components such as the GMCH and ICH are organized as multiple
devices). A function is defined as the end source or target of the bus transaction. A device may
contain one or more functions.
This system use two PCI buses. The PCI bus #0 is internal to the 810e chipset and divided by the
hub link bus. The PCI bus #1 is used by the NIC function (Figure 4-1). As this system is designed
for simplicity of system management, the PCI buses are not available for expansion purposes.
82810e GMCH
Component
PCI Bus #0
Memory
Controller
Function
AGP
Bridge
Function
Hub Link Bus
82801 ICH Component
PCI Bus #0
Hub Link/PCI
Bridge
Function
EIDE
Controller
Function
USB
I/F
Function
SMBus
Controller
Function
LPC
Bridge
Function
AC97
Audio
Function
PCI Bus #1
82559
NIC
I/F
Function
Figure 4-1. PCI Bus Devices and Functions
4-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.2.1 PCI BUS TRANSACTIONS
The PCI bus consists of a 32-bit path (AD31-00 lines) that uses a multiplexed scheme for
handling both address and data transfers. A bus transaction consists of an address cycle and one
or more data cycles, with each cycle requiring a clock (PCICLK) cycle. High performance is
realized during burst modes in which a transaction with contiguous memory locations requires
that only one address cycle be conducted and subsequent data cycles are completed using auto-
incremented addressing. Four types of address cycles can take place on the PCI bus; I/O,
memory, configuration, and special. Address decoding is distributed (left up to each device on the
PCI bus).
4.2.1.1 I/O and Memory Cycles
For I/O and memory cycles, a standard 32-bit address decode (AD31..0) for byte-level addressing
is handled by the appropriate PCI device. For memory addressing, PCI devices decode the
AD31..2 lines for dword-level addressing and check the AD1,0 lines for burst (linear-
incrementing) mode. In burst mode, subsequent data phases are conducted a dword at a time with
addressing assumed to increment accordingly (four bytes at a time).
4.2.1.2 Configuration Cycles
Devices on the PCI bus must comply with PCI protocol that allows configuration of that device
by software. In this system, configuration mechanism #1 (as described in the PCI Local Bus
specification Rev. 2.1) is employed. This method uses two 32-bit registers for initiating a
configuration cycle for accessing the configuration space of a PCI device. The configuration
address register (CONFIG_ADDRESS) at 0CF8h holds a value that specifies the PCI bus, PCI
device, and specific register to be accessed. The configuration data register (CONFIG_DATA) at
0CFCh contains the configuration data.
PCI Configuration Address Register
PCI Configuration Data Register
I/O Port 0CF8h, R/W, (32-bit access only)
I/O Port 0CFCh, R/W, (8-, 16-, 32-bit access)
Bit
Function
Bit
Function
31
Configuration Enable
0 = Disabled
31..0
Configuration Data.
1 = Enable
30..24
23..16
15..11
Reserved - read/write 0s
Bus Number. Selects PCI bus
PCI Device Number. Selects PCI
device for access
10..8
Function Number. Selects function of
selected PCI device.
Register Index. Specifies config. reg.
Configuration Cycle Type ID.
00 = Type 0
7..2
1,0
01 = Type 1
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
Figure 4-2 shows how the loading of 0CF8h results in a Type 0 configuration cycle on the PCI
bus. The Device Number (bits <15..11> determines which one of the AD31..11 lines is to be
asserted high for the IDSEL signal, which acts as a “chip select” function for the PCI device to be
configured. The function number (CF8h, bits <10..8>) is used to select a particular function
within a PCI component.
3130
31
24 23
16 15
Bus
Number
11 10
Function
Number
8
7
2 1 0
Device
Number
Register
Reserved
0 0
Register 0CF8h
Results in:
Index
11 10
8
7
2 1 0
AD31..0
w/Type 0
Function
Number
Register
Index
IDSEL (only one signal line asserted)
Config. Cycle
Figure 4-2. Type 0 Configuration Cycle
Type 0 configuration cycles are used for configuring devices on PCI bus # 0. Type 1
configuration cycles (reg. 0CF8h bits <1,0> = 01b) are passed on to PCI bus # 1. Table 4-1 shows
the standard configuration of device numbers for components and slots residing on a PCI bus.
Table 4-1.
PCI Component Configuration Access
PCI
PCI Component
82810e GMCH:
Memory Controller
AGP Bridge
Function #
Device #
Bus #
0
0
0
0 (00h)
1(01h)
0 (00h)
0
0
2
AGP slot
82801 ICH:
PCI Bridge
LPC Bridge
0
0
1
2
3
5
6
0
30 (1Eh)
31 (1Fh)
31 (1Fh)
31 (1Fh)
31 (1Fh)
31 (1Fh)
31 (1Fh)
2 (02h)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
EIDE Controller
USB I/F
SMBus Controller
AC97 Audio Controller
AC97 Modem Controller
82559 Network I/F Controller
NOTES:
Not implemented.
4-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
The register index (CF8h, bits <7..2>) identifies the 32-bit location within the configuration
space of the PCI device to be accessed. All PCI devices can contain up to 256 bytes of
configuration data (Figure 4-3), of which the first 64 bytes comprise the configuration space
header.
Register
Index
31
24 23
16 15
8
7
0
FCh
Device-Specific Area
40h
3Ch
Min_Lat
BIST
Min_GNT
Interrupt Pin
Interrupt Line
Base Address Registers and Exp. ROM Address
Configuration
Space
Header
Latency Timer
Cache Line Size
Revision ID
Header Type
Class Code
0Ch
08h
04h
Command
Vender ID
Status
Device ID
00h
Data required by PCI protocol
Not required
Figure 4-3. PCI Configuration Space Map
Each PCI device is identified with a vender ID (assigned to the vender by the PCI Special Interest
Group) and a device ID (assigned by the vender). The device and vender IDs for the devices on
the system board are listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2.
System Board PCI Device Identification
PCI Device
Vender ID
Device ID
82810e GMCH:
Memory Controller
AGP Bridge
8086h
8086h
2500h
2501h
82801 ICH:
PCI Bridge
LPC Bridge
8086h
8086h
8086h
8086h
8086h
8086h
8086h
2418h
2410h
2411h
2412h
2413h
2415h
1229h
EIDE Controller
USB I/F
SMBus Controller
AC97 Audio Controller
82559 Network I/F Controller
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
4.2.2 PCI INTERRUPT MAPPING
The PCI bus provides for four interrupt signals; INTA-, INTB-, INTC-, and INTD-. These
signals may be generated by on-board PCI devices or by devices installed in the PCI slots. In
order to minimize latency, INTx- signal routing from the interrupt controller of the ICH to PCI
slots/devices is distributed evenly as shown below:
Intr.
AGP
Cntlr.
INTA-
INTB-
--
Audio
Cntlr.
--
INTB-
--
NIC I/F
USB I/F
Cntlr.
INTA-
INTB-
INTC-
INTD-
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
INTA-
INTD-
NOTE:
Interrupts generated by PCI devices can be configured to share the standard AT (IRQn) interrupt lines.
Two devices that share a single PCI interrupt must also share the corresponding AT interrupt.
4.2.3 PCI POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT
This system complies with the PCI Power Management Interface Specification (rev 1.0). The PCI
Power Management Enable (PME-) signal is supported by the 810 and 820 chipsets and allows
compliant PCI and AGP peripherals to initiate the power management routine.
4.2.4 PCI SUB-BUSSES
The 810e chipset implements two data busses that supplement the PCI bus:
♦
♦
Hub Link Bus
LPC Bus
4.2.4.1 Hub Link Bus
The 810e chipset implements a Hub Link bus between the GMCH and the ICH. The Hub Link
bus handles transactions at a 66-MHz rate using PCI-type protocol. This bus is transparent to
software and not accessible for expansion purposes.
4.2.4.2 LPC Bus
The 82801 ICH implements a Low Pin Count (LPC) bus for handling transactions to and from
the 47B277 Super I/O Controller as well as the 82802 FWH. The LPC bus transfers data a nibble
(4 bits) at a time at a 33-MHz rate. This bus is transparent to software and not accessible for
expansion purposes.
4-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.2.5 PCI CONFIGURATION
PCI bus operations, especially those that involve ISA bus interaction, require the configuration of
certain parameters such as PCI IRQ routing, DMA channel configuration, RTC control, port
decode ranges, and firmware hub (FWH) access control. These parameters are handled by the
LPC I/F bridge function (PCI function #0, device 31) of the ICH component and configured
through the PCI configuration space registers listed in Table 4-3. Configuration is provided by
BIOS at power-up but re-configurable by software.
Table 4-3.
LPC Bridge Configuration Registers
(ICH, Function 0, Device 31)
PCI Config.
Addr.
00, 01h
02, 03h
04, 05h
06, 07h
08h
09-0Bh
0Eh
40-43hh
44h
4E, 4Fh
54h
58-5Bh
5Ch
60-63h
64h
Reset
Value
8086h
2410h
000Fh
0280h
00h
00h
01h
1
00h
0000h
80h
1
00h
80h
PCI Config.
Addr.
88h
Reset
Value
00h
00h
0000h
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
Command
Status
Revision ID
Class Code
Header Type
ACPI Base Address
ACPI Control
BIOS Control
TCO Control
GPIO Base Address
GPIO Control
PCI IRQ Routing Cntrl.
Serial IRQ Control
Register
Device 31 Error Config.
Device 31 Error Status
PCI DMA Configuration
Power Management
General Control
8Ah
90, 91h
A0-CFh
D0-D3h
D4-D7h
D8h
E1h
E2h
E3h
E4, E5h
E6, E7h
E8h
EC, EDh
F2, F3h
0’s
F00h
00h
00h
00h
80h
0000h
0000h
General Status
RTC Configuration
COM Port Decode Range
DD & LPT Port Dec. Range
FWH Decode Enable
LPC I/F Decode Range 1
LPC I/F Enables
FWH Select
LPC I/F Decode Range 2
Functions Disable
0000h
00
10h
NOTE: Assume unmarked locations/gaps as reserved.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-7
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
4.3
AGP BUS OVERVIEW
NOTE: This section provides a brief overview of AGP bus operation. For a detailed
description of AGP bus operations refer to the AGP Interface Specification available at
the following AGP forum web site: http://www.agpforum.org/index.htm
The Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) bus is specifically designed as an economical yet high-
performance interface for graphics adapters, especially those designed for 3D operations. The
AGP interface is designed to give graphics adapters dedicated pipelined access to system memory
for the purpose of off-loading texturing, z-buffering, and alpha blending used in 3D graphics
operations. By off-loading a large portion of 3D data to system memory the AGP graphics
adapter only requires enough memory for frame buffer (display image) refreshing.
As this system is designed for simplicity of system management, the AGP bus is not available
for expansion purposes.
4.3.1 BUS TRANSACTIONS
The operation of the AGP bus is based on the 66-MHz PCI specification but includes additional
mechanisms to increase bandwidth. During the configuration phase the AGP bus acts in
accordance with PCI protocol. Once graphics data handling operation is initiated, AGP-defined
protocols take effect. The AGP graphics adapter acts generally as the AGP master, but can also
behave as a “PCI” target during fast writes from the GMCH or MCH.
Key differences between the AGP interface and the PCI interface are as follows:
♦
♦
Address phase and associated data transfer phase are disconnected transactions. Addressing
and data transferring occur as contiguous actions on the PCI bus. On the AGP bus a request
for data and the transfer of data may be separated by other operations.
Commands on the AGP bus specify system memory accesses only. Unlike the PCI bus,
commands involving I/O and configuration are not required or allowed. The system memory
address space used in AGP operations is the same linear space used by PCI memory space
commands, but is further specified by the graphics address re-mapping table (GART) of the
north bridge component.
♦
♦
Data transactions on the AGP bus involve eight bytes or multiples of eight bytes. The AGP
memory addressing protocol uses 8-byte boundaries as opposed to PCI’s 4-byte boundaries. If
a transfer of less than eight bytes is needed, the remaining bytes are filled with arbitrary data
that is discarded by the target.
Pipelined requests are defined by length or size on the AGP bus. The PCI bus defines
transfer lengths with the FRAME- signal.
There are two basic types of transactions on the AGP bus: data requests (addressing) and data
transfers. These actions are separate from each other.
4-8 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.3.1.1 Data Request
Requesting data is accomplished in one of two ways; either multiplexed addressing (using the
AD lines for addressing/data) or demultiplexed (“sideband”) addressing (using the SBA lines for
addressing only and the AD lines for data only). Even though there are only eight SBA lines (as
opposed to the 32 AD lines) sideband addressing maximizes efficiency and throughput by
allowing the AD lines to be exclusively used for data transfers. Sideband addressing occurs at
the same rate (1X or 2X) as data transfers. The differences in rates will be discussed in the next
section describing data transfers. Note also that sideband addressing is limited to 48 bits (address
bits 48-63 are assumed zero). The GMCH and MCH components support both SBA and AD
addressing, but the method and rate is selected by the AGP graphics adapter.
4.3.1.2 Data Transfers
Data transfers use the AD lines and occur as the result of data requests described previously.
Each transaction resulting from a request involves at least eight bytes, requiring the 32 AD lines
to handle at least two transfers per request. The 82810e MCH supports two transfer rates: 1X and
2X. Regardless of the rate used, the speed of the bus clock is constant at 66 MHz. The following
subsections describe how the use of additional strobe signals makes possible higher transfer rates.
AGP 1X Transfers
During a AGP 1X transfer the 66-MHz CLK signal is used to qualify the control and data
signals. Each 4-byte data transfer is synchronous with one CLK cycle so it takes two CLK cycles
for a minimum 8-byte transfer (Figure 4-4 shows two 8-byte transfers). The GNT- and TRDY-
signals retain their traditional PCI functions. The ST0..3 signals are used for priority encoding,
with “000” for low priority and “001” indicating high priority. The signal level for AGP 1X
transfers may be 3.3 or 1.5 VDC.
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
CLK
AD
D1A
xxx
D1B
xxx
D2A
D2B
xxx
GNT-
TRDY-
ST0..2
xxx
00x
xxx
Figure 4-4. AGP 1X Data Transfer (Peak Transfer Rate: 266 MB/s)
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-9
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
AGP 2X Transfers
During AGP 2X transfers, clocking is basically the same as in 1X transfers except that the 66-
MHz CLK signal is used to qualify only the control signals. The data bytes are latched by an
additional strobe (AD_STBx) signal so that an 8-byte transfer occurs in one CLK cycle (Figure 4-
5). The first four bytes (DnA) are latched by the receiving agent on the falling edge of AD_STBx
and the second four bytes (DnB) are latched on the rising edge of AD_STBx. The signal level for
AGP 2X transfers may be 3.3 or 1.5 VDC.
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
CLK
AD
D1A D1B D2A D2B D3A D3B D4A D4B
AD_STBx
GNT-
TRDY-
ST0..2
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
00x
xxx
Figure 4-5. AGP 2X Data Transfer (Peak Transfer Rate: 532 MB/s)
4-10 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.3.2 AGP CONFIGURATION
AGP bus operations require the configuration of certain parameters involving system memory
access by the AGP graphics adapter. The AGP bus interface is configured as a PCI device
integrated within the north bridge (MCH, device 1) component. The AGP function is, from the
PCI bus perspective, treated essentially as a PCI/PCI bridge and configured through PCI
configuration registers (Table 4-4). Configuration is accomplished by BIOS during POST.
NOTE: Configuration of the AGP bus interface involves functions 0 and 1 of the
MCH. Function 0 registers (listed in Table 3-4) include functions that affect basic
control (GART) of the AGP.
Table 4-4.
PCI/AGP Bridge Function Configuration Registers
(GMCH, Function 1)
PCI Config.
Addr.
00, 01h
02, 03h
04, 05h
06, 07h
08h
0A, 0Bh
0Eh
18h
Reset
Value
8086h
7191h
0000h
0220h
00h
0406h
01h
00h
PCI Config.
Addr.
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1E, 1Fh
20, 21h
22, 23h
24, 25h
26, 27h
3Eh
Reset
Value
00h
F0h
00h
02A0h
FFF0h
0000h
FFF0h
0000h
80h
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
Command
Status
Revision ID
Class Code
Header Type
Primary Bus Number
Secondary Bus Number
Subordinate Bus Number
Register
Sec. Master Latency Timer
I/O Base Address
I/O Limit Address
Sec. PCI/PCI Status
Memory Base Address
Memory Limit Address
Prefetch Mem. Base Addr.
Prefetch Mem. Limit Addr.
PCI/PCI Bridge Control
Reserved
19h
1Ah
00h
00h
3F-FFh
00h
NOTE:
Assume unmarked locations/gaps as reserved. Refer to Intel documentation for detailed
register descriptions.
The AGP graphics adapter (actually its resident controller) is configured as a standard PCI
device.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-11
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
4.4
INTERRUPTS
The microprocessor uses two types of interrupts; maskable and nonmaskable. A maskable
interrupt can be enabled or disabled within the microprocessor by the use of the STI and CLI
instructions. A nonmaskable interrupt cannot be masked off within the microprocessor but may
be inhibited by hardware or software means external to the microprocessor.
4.4.1 MASKABLE INTERRUPTS
The maskable interrupt is a hardware-generated signal used by peripheral functions within the
system to get the attention of the microprocessor. Peripheral functions produce a unique INTA-D
(PCI) or IRQ0-15 (ISA) signal that is routed to interrupt processing logic that asserts the
interrupt (INTR-) input to the microprocessor. The microprocessor halts execution to determine
the source of the interrupt and then services the peripheral as appropriate.
Figure 4-6 shows the routing of PCI and ISA interrupts. Most IRQs are routed through the I/O
controller, which contains a serializing function. A serialized interrupt stream is applied to the
82801 ICH.
LPC47B277
IRQ3..7,
I/O Cntlr.
9..12,
14,15
Interrupt
Serializer
I/O and
SM Functions
Serial IRQ
82801
ICH
IDE
Hard Drive
IRQ14,15
INTA-..D-
INTR-
Interrupt
Processing
Microprocessor
PCI Peripherals
Figure 4-6. Maskable Interrupt Processing, Block Diagram
The 82801 ICH component, which includes the equivalent of two 8259 interrupt controllers
cascaded together, handles the decoding of the serial interrupt stream (Serial IRQ signal) as well
as interrupts IRQ14 and 15 from the IDE hard drives. The ICH also receives the PCI interrupt
signals (INTA-..INTD-) from PCI devices. The PCI interrupts can be configured by PCI
Configuration Registers 60h..63h to share the standard ISA interrupts (IRQn). The power-up
default configuration has the PIRQn disabled. Table 4-13 lists the standard source configuration
for maskable interrupts and their priorities. If more than one interrupt is pending, the highest
priority (lowest number) is processed first.
The 82801 ICH is configured to handle interrupts in 8259-mode.
4-12 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table 4-5.
Maskable Interrupt Priorities and Assignments
Priority
1
2
Signal Label
IRQ0
Source (Typical)
Interval timer 1, counter 0
PS/2 Keyboard
Notes
IRQ1
[1]
3
4
IRQ8-
IRQ9
Real-time clock
Unused
5
6
7
8
IRQ10
IRQ11
IRQ12
IRQ13
IRQ14
IRQ15
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
Unused
Unused
PS/2 Mouse
Coprocessor (math)
IDE primary I/F
IDE secondary I/F
Unused
Serial port (COM1)
[1]
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
--
[1]
[1]
Unused
Unused
Parallel port (LPT1)
NOT AVAILABLE (Cascade from interrupt controller 2)
IRQ2
NOTE:
[1] Legacy-light models only
Interrupts generated by PCI devices can be configured to share the standard AT (IRQn) interrupt
lines. Also, PCI interrupts are hardwired for even distribution to minimize latency (see section
4.2.2 “PCI Interrupt Mapping”).
Maskable Interrupt processing is controlled and monitored through standard AT-type I/O-
mapped registers. These registers are listed in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6.
Maskable Interrupt Control Registers
I/O Port
020h
Register
Base Address, Int. Cntlr. 1
021h
0A0h
0A1h
Initialization Command Word 2-4, Int. Cntlr. 1
Base Address, Int. Cntlr. 2
Initialization Command Word 2-4, Int. Cntlr. 2
The initialization and operation of the interrupt control registers follows standard AT-type
protocol.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-13
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
4.4.2 NON-MASKABLE INTERRUPTS
Non-maskable interrupts cannot be masked (inhibited) within the microprocessor itself but may
be maskable by software using logic external to the microprocessor. There are two non-maskable
interrupt signals: the NMI- and the SMI-. These signals have service priority over all maskable
interrupts, with the SMI- having top priority over all interrupts including the NMI-.
4.4.2.1 NMI- Generation
The Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI-) signal can be generated by one of the following actions:
♦
♦
♦
Parity errors detected on the ISA bus (activating IOCHK-).
Parity errors detected on a PCI bus (activating SERR- or PERR-).
Microprocessor internal error (activating IERRA or IERRB)
The IOCHK-, SERR-, and PERR- signals are routed through the ICH component, which in turn
activates the NMI to the microprocessor.
The NMI Status Register at I/O port 061h contains NMI source and status data as follows:
NMI Status Register 61h
Bit
Function
7
NMI Status:
0 = No NMI from system board parity error.
1 = NMI requested, read only
6
IOCHK- NMI:
0 = No NMI from IOCHK-
1 = IOCHK- is active (low), NMI requested, read only
Interval Timer 1, Counter 2 (Speaker) Status
Refresh Indicator (toggles with every refresh)
IOCHK- NMI Enable/Disable:
5
4
3
0 = NMI from IOCHK- enabled
1 = NMI from IOCHK- disabled and cleared (R/W)
System Board Parity Error (PERR/SERR) NMI Enable:
0 = Parity error NMI enabled
2
1 = Parity error NMI disabled and cleared (R/W)
1
0
Speaker Data (R/W)
Inteval Timer 1, Counter 2 Gate Signal (R/W)
0 = Counter 2 disabled
1 = Counter 2 enabled
Functions not related to NMI activity.
After the active NMI has been processed, status bits <7> or <6> are cleared by pulsing bits <2>
or <3> respectively.
The NMI Enable Register (070h, <7>) is used to enable/disable the NMI signal. Writing 80h to
this register masks generation of the NMI-. Note that the lower six bits of register at I/O port 70h
affect RTC operation and should be considered when changing NMI- generation status.
4-14 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.4.2.2 SMI- Generation
The SMI- (System Management Interrupt) is typically used for power management functions.
When power management is enabled, inactivity timers are monitored. When a timer times out,
SMI- is asserted and invokes the microprocessor’s SMI handler. The SMI- handler works with
the APM BIOS to service the SMI- according to the cause of the timeout.
Although the SMI- is primarily used for power managment the interrupt is also employed for the
QuickLock/QuickBlank functions as well.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-15
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
4.5
INTERVAL TIMER
The interval timer generates pulses at software (programmable) intervals. A 8254-compatible
timer is integrated into the 82801 component. The timer function provides three counters, the
functions of which are listed in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7.
Interval Timer Functions
Counter
Function
System Clock
Refresh
Gate
Clock In
1.193 MHz
1.193 MHz
1.193 MHz
Clock Out
IRQ0
Refresh Req.
Speaker Input
0
1
2
Always on
Always on
Port 61, bit<0>
Speaker Tone
The interval timer is controlled through the I/O mapped registers listed in Table 4-8.
Table 4-8.
Interval Timer Control Registers
I/O Port
040h
041h
042h
043h
Register
Read or write value, counter 0
Read or write value, counter 1
Read or write value, counter 2
Control Word
4.6
SYSTEM CLOCK DISTRIBUTION
These systems use a CK133 clock generator (for 820-based systems) or a CK Whitney or
ICS92250-16 clock generator (for 810/810e-based systems). Table 4-9 lists the system board
clock signals and how they are distributed.
Table 4-9.
Clock Generation and Distribution
Frequncy/Signal
Source
Destination
66, 100, or 133 MHz
(CPUCLK) [1]
100 MHz
CLK Gen.
Processor, GMCH
CK
“
“
DIMM sockets
82801 ICH, 47B277 I/O Cntlr.
82801 ICH
CK133
82801 ICH
48 MHz
33 MHz (PCICLK)
14.31818 MHz
14.31818 MHz
Crystal
CLK Gen
NOTE:
[1] Depending on processor speed.
4-16 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.7
REAL-TIME CLOCK AND CONFIGURATION MEMORY
The Real-time clock (RTC) and configuration memory (also referred to as “CMOS”) functions
are provided by the 82801 ICH component and is MC146818-compatible. As shown in the
following figure, the 82801 ICH component provides 256 bytes of battery-backed RAM divided
into two 128-byte configuration memory areas. The RTC uses the first 14 bytes (00-0Dh) of the
standard memory area. All locations of the standard memory area (00-7Fh) can be directly
accessed using conventional OUT and IN assembly language instructions through I/O ports
70h/71h, although the suggested method is to use the INT15 AX=E823h BIOS call. Also note
that CMOS locations above 3Fh are used for the control and status of features that should be
handled through BIOS function INT15h, AX=E845h.
82801
Register D
Register C
Register B
Register A
Year
Month
Date of Month
Day of Week
Hours (Alarm)
Hours (Timer)
Minutes (Alarm)
Minutes (Timer)
Seconds (Alarm)
Seconds (Timer)
0Dh
0Ch
0Bh
FFh
Extended Config.
Memory Area
(128 bytes)
0Ah
09h
08h
07h
06h
05h
04h
03h
02h
01h
00h
80h
7Fh
Standard Config.
Memory Area
(114 bytes)
0Eh
0Dh
RTC Area
(14 bytes)
00h
Figure 4-7. Configuration Memory Map
A lithium 3-VDC battery is used for maintaining the RTC and configuration memory while the
system is powered down. During system operation a wire-Ored circuit allows the RTC and
configuration memory to draw power from the power supply. The battery is located in a battery
holder on the system board and has a life expectancy of four to eight years. When the battery has
expired it is replaced with a Renata CR2032 or equivalent 3-VDC lithium battery.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-17
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
Table 4-10 lists the mapping of the configuration memory.
Table 4-10.
Configuration Memory (CMOS) Map
Location
00-0Dh
0Eh
0Fh
10h
11h
12h
13h
Function
Real-time clock
Diagnostic status
System reset code
Diskette drive type
Reserved
Hard drive type
Security functions
Location
24h
25h
26h
27h
28h
29h
2Ah
Function
System board ID
System architecture data
Auxiliary peripheral configuration
Speed control external drive
Expanded/base mem. size, IRQ12
Miscellaneous configuration
Hard drive timeout
14h
15h
16h
17h
18h
19h
1Ah
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1Eh
1Fh
Equipment installed
2Bh
2Ch
2Dh
2Eh-2Fh
30h-31h
32h
33h
34h
35h
36h
37h-3Fh
40-FFh
System inactivity timeout
Monitor timeout, Num Lock Cntrl
Additional flags
Checksum of locations 10h-2Dh
Total extended memory tested
Century
Miscellaneous flags set by BIOS
International language
APM status flags
ECC POST test single bit
Power-on password
Base memory size, low byte/KB
Base memory size, high byte/KB
Extended memory, low byte/KB
Extended memory, high byte/KB
Hard drive 1, primary controller
Hard drive 2, primary controller
Hard drive 1, secondary controller
Hard drive 2, secondary controller
Enhanced hard drive support
Reserved
Power management functions
Feature Control/Status
NOTES:
Assume unmarked gaps are reserved.
Higher locations (>3Fh) contain information that should be accessed using the INT15, AX=E845h
BIOS function (refer to Chapter 8 for BIOS function descriptions).
4.7.1 CMOS ARCHIVE
There is no provision for clearing the contents of the configuration memory (CMOS). During
POST, a copy of the CMOS data is written to a sector of the 82802 FWH. This means that
changes to CMOS will be stored on the following boot. Should the system hang during boot as
the result of corrupted CMOS data, then a Power Button Override boot should be invoked with
the following procedure:
1. Initiate a power cycle by pressing and releasing the Power button, then pressing and holding
the power button for about four seconds so that the system should record a power button
override event.
2. Power down the system.
3. Press and release the power button, initiating a boot sequence. The system should detect the
occurrence of a power button override event and will load the CMOS archive data stored in
the FWH allowing a successful boot. All passwords and settings used in the previous
successful boot would be restored.
4.7.2 STANDARD CMOS LOCATIONS
The following paragraphs describe standard configuration memory locations 0Ah-3Fh. These
locations are accessible through using OUT/IN assembly language instructions using port 70/71h
or BIOS function INT15, AX=E823h.
4-18 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
RTC Control Register A, Byte 0Ah
Bit
Function
7
Update in Progress. Read only.
0 = Time update will not occur before 2444 us
1 = Time update will occur within 2444 us
Divider Chain Control. R/W.
00x = Oscillator disabled.
010 = Normal operation (time base frequency = 32.768 KHz).
11x = Divider chain reset.
6..4
3..0
Periodic Interrupt Control. R/W. Specifies the periodic interrupt interval.
0000 = none
1000 = 3.90625 ms
1001 = 7.8125 ms
1010 = 15. 625 ms
1011 = 31.25 ms
1100 = 62.50 ms
1101 = 125 ms
0001 = 3.90625 ms
0010 = 7.8125 ms
0011 = 122.070 us
0100 = 244.141 us
0101 = 488.281 us
0110 = 976.562 us
0111 = 1.953125 ms
1110 = 250 ms
1111 = 500 ms
RTC Control Register B, Byte 0Bh
Bit
Function
7
Time Update Enable/disable
0 = Normal operation, 1 = Disable time updating for time set
Periodic Interrupt Enable/Disable.
6
5
4
0 = Disable,
1 = Enable interval specified by Register A
Alarm Interrupt Enable/disable
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
End-of-Update Interrupt Enable/Disable
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
Reserved (read 0)
3
2
Time/Date Format Select
0 = BCD format, 1 = Binary format
Time Mode
1
0
0 = 12-hour mode, 1 = 24-hour mode
Automatic Daylight Savings Time Enable/Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable (Advance 1 hour on 1st Sunday in April, retreat 1 hour on last Sunday in October).
RTC Status Register C, Byte 0Ch
Bit
7
6
5
4
Function
If set, interrupt output signal active (read only)
If set, indicates periodic interrupt flag
If set, indicates alarm interrupt
If set, indicates end-of-update interrupt
Reserved
3..0
RTC Status Register D, Byte 0Dh
Bit
Function
7
RTC Power Status
0 = RTC has lost power
1 = RTC has not lost power
Reserved
6..0
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-19
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
Configuration Byte 0Eh, Diagnostic Status
Default Value = 00h
This byte contains diagnostic status data.
Configuration Byte 0Fh, System Reset Code
Default Value = 00h
This byte contains the system reset code.
Configuration Byte 10h, Diskette Drive Type
Bit
7..4
3..0
Function
Primary (Drive A) Diskette Drive Type
Secondary (Drive B) Diskette Drive Type
Valid values for bits <7..4> and bits <3..0>:
0000 = Not installed
0001 = 360-KB drive
0010 = 1.2-MB drive
0011 = 720-KB drive
0100 = 1.44-MB/1.25-MB drive
0110 = 2.88-MB drive
(all other values reserved)
Configuration Byte 12h, Hard Drive Type
Bit
Function
7..4
Primary Controller 1, Hard Drive 1 Type:
0000 = none
1000 = Type 8
0001 = Type 1
0010 = Type 2
0011 = Type 3
0100 = Type 4
0101 = Type 5
0110 = Type 6
0111 = Type 7
1001 = Type 9
1010 = Type 10
1011 = Type 11
1100 = Type 12
1101 = Type 13
1110 = Type 14
1111 = other (use bytes 19h)
3..0
Primary Controller 1, Hard Drive 2 Type:
0000 = none
1000 = Type 8
0001 = Type 1
0010 = Type 2
0011 = Type 3
0100 = Type 4
0101 = Type 5
0110 = Type 6
0111 = Type 7
1001 = Type 9
1010 = Type 10
1011 = Type 11
1100 = Type 12
1101 = Type 13
1110 = Type 14
1111 = other (use bytes 1Ah)
4-20 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Configuration Byte 13h, Security Functions
Default Value = 00h
Bit
7
Function
Reserved
6
QuickBlank Enable After Standby:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
5
Administrator Password:
0 = Not present
1 = Present
4
3
Reserved
Diskette Boot Enable:
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
2
1
0
QuickLock Enable:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Network Server Mode/Security Lock Override:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Password State (Set by BIOS at Power-up)
0 = Not set
1 = Set
Configuration Byte 14h, Equipment Installed
Default Value (standard configuration) = 03h
Bit
Function
7,6
No. of Diskette Drives Installed:
00 = 1 drive
01 = 2 drives
10 = 3 drives
11 = 4 drives
5..2
1
Reserved
Coprocessor Present
0 = Coprocessor not installed
1 = Coprocessor installed
Diskette Drives Present
0
0 = No diskette drives installed
1 = Diskette drive(s) installed
Configuration Bytes 15h and 16h, Base Memory Size
Default Value = 280h
Bytes 15h and 16h hold a 16-bit value that specifies the base memory size in 1-KB (1024)
increments. Valid base memory sizes are 512 and 640 kilobytes .
Configuration Bytes 17h and 18h, Extended Memory Size
Bytes 17h and 18h hold a 16-bit value that specifies the extended memory size in 1-KB
increments.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-21
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
Configuration Bytes 19h-1Ch, Hard Drive Types
Byte 19h contains the hard drive type for drive 1 of the primary controller if byte 12h bits <7..4>
hold 1111b. Byte 1Ah contains the hard drive type for drive 2 of the primary controller if byte
12h bits <3..0> hold 1111b. Bytes1Bh and 1Ch contain the hard drive types for hard drives 1 and
2 of the secondary controller.
Configuration Byte 1Dh, Enhanced IDE Hard Drive Support
Default Value = F0h
Bit
7
6
5
4
Function
EIDE - Drive C (83h)
EIDE - Drive D (82h)
EIDE - Drive E (81h)
EIDE - Drive F (80h)
Reserved
3..0
Values for bits <7..4> :
0 = Disable
1 = Enable for auto-configure
Configuration Byte 1Fh, Power Management Functions
Default Value = 00h
Bit
7..4
3
Function
Reserved
Slow Processor Clock for Low Power Mode
0 = Processor runs at full speed
1 = Processor runs at slow speed
Reserved
2
1
Monitor Off Mode
0 = Turn monitor power off after 45 minutes in standby
1 = Leave monitor power on
Energy Saver Mode Indicator (Blinking LED)
0 = Disable
0
1 = Enable
Configuration Byte 24h, System Board Identification
Default Value = 7Eh
Configuration memory location 24h holds the system board ID.
Configuration Byte 25h, System Architecture Data
Default Value = 0Bh
Bit
7..4
3
Function
Reserved
Unmapping of ROM:
0 = Allowed
1 = Not allowed
2
Reserved
1,0
Diagnostic Status Byte Address
00 = Memory locations 80C00000h-80C00004h
01 = I/O ports 878h-87Ch
11 = neither place
4-22 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Configuration Byte 26h, Auxiliary Peripheral Configuration
Default Value = 00h
Bit
Function
7,6
I/O Delay Select
00 = 420 ns (default)
01 = 300 ns
10 = 2600 ns
11 = 540 ns
5
4
3
2
1
0
Alternative A20 Switching
0 = Disable port 92 mode
1 = Enable port 92 mode
Bi-directional Print Port Mode
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Graphics Type
0 = Color
1 = Monochrome
Hard Drive Primary/Secondary Address Select:
0 = Primary
1 = Secondary
Diskette I/O Port
0 = Primary
1 = Secondary
Diskette I/O Port Enable
0 = Primary
1 = Secondary
Configuration Byte 27h, Speed Control/External Drive
Default Value = 00h
Bit
Function
7
Boot Speed
0 = Max MHz
1 = Fast speed
Reserved
6..0
Configuration Byte 28h, Expanded and Base Memory, IRQ12 Select
Default Value = 00h
Bit
Function
7
IRQ12 Select
0 = Mouse
1 = Expansion bus
Base Memory Size:
00 = 640 KB
01 = 512 KB
10 = 256 KB
11 = Invalid
6,5
4..0
Internal Compaq Memory:
00000 = None
00001 = 512 KB
00010 = 1 MB
00011 = 1.5 MB
.
.
11111 = 15.5 MB
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-23
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
Configuration Byte 29h, Miscellaneous Configuration Data
Default Value = 00h
Bit
7..5
4
Function
Reserved
Primary Hard Drive Enable (Non-PCI IDE Controllers)
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Reserved
3..0
Configuration Byte 2Ah, Hard Drive Timeout
Default Value = 02h
Bit
7..5
4..0
Function
Reserved
Hard Drive Timeout (index to SIT timeout record)
Configuration Byte 2Bh, System Inactivity Timeout
Default Value = 23h
Bit
7
Function
Reserved
6,5
Power Conservation Boot
00 = Reserved
01 = PC on
10 = PC off
11 = Reserved
4..0
System Inactive Timeout. (Index to SIT system timeout record)
00000 = Disabled
Configuration Byte 2Ch, ScreenSave and NUMLOCK Control
Default Value = 00h
Bit
7
Function
Reserved
6
Numlock Control
0 = Numlock off at power on
1 = Numlock on at power on
Screen Blank Control:
5
0 = No screen blank
1 = Screen blank w/QuickLock
ScreenSave Timeout. (Index to SIT monitor timeout record)
000000 = Disabled
4..0
4-24 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Configuration Byte 2Dh, Additional Flags
Default Value = 00h
Bit
7..5
4
Function
Reserved
Memory Test
0 = Test memory on power up only
1 = Test memory on warm boot
POST Error Handling (BIOS Defined)
0 = Display “Press F1 to Continue” on error
1 = Skip F1 message
Reserved
3
2..0
Configuration Byte 2Eh, 2Fh, Checksum
These bytes hold the checksum of bytes 10h to 2Dh.
Configuration Byte 30h, 31h, Total Extended Memory Tested
This location holds the amount of system memory that checked good during the POST.
Configuration Byte 32h, Century
This location holds the Century value in a binary coded decimal (BCD) format.
Configuration Byte 33h, Miscellaneous Flags
Default Value = 80h
Bit
Function
7
Memory Above 640 KB
0 = No, 1 = Yes
6
5
Reserved
Weitek Numeric Coprocessor Present:
0 = Not installed, 1 = Installed
Standard Numeric Coprocessor Present:
0 = Not installed, 1 = Installed
Reserved
4
3..0
Configuration Byte 34h, International Language Support
Default Value = 00h
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-25
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
Configuration Byte 35h, APM Status Flags
Default Value = 11h
Bit
Function
7..6
Power Conservation State:
00 = Ready
01 = Standby
10 = Suspend
11 = Off
5,4
3
Reserved
32-bit Connection:
0 = Disconnected, 1 = Connected
16-bit Connection
0 = Disconnected, 1 = Connected
Real Mode Connection
0 = Disconnected, 1 = Connected
Power Management Enable:
0 = Disabled
2
1
0
1 = Enabled
Configuration Byte 36h, ECC POST Test Single Bit Errors
Default Value = 01h
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Function
Row 7 Error Detect
Row 6 Error Detect
Row 5 Error Detect
Row 4 Error Detect
Row 3 Error Detect
Row 2 Error Detect
Row 1 Error Detect
Row 0 Error Detect
0 = No single bit error detected.
1 = Single bit error detected.
Configuration Byte 37h-3Fh, Power-On Password
These eight locations hold the power-on password.
4.7.3 CMOS FEATURE BITS
Configuration memory above location 3Fh is used for storing special features that are accessed
using BIOS function INT15, AX=E845h. Refer to Chapter 8 for more information on accessing
the feature bits with BIOS.
4-26 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.8
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
This section describes functions having to do with security, power management, temperature, and
overall status. These functions are handled by hardware and firmware (BIOS) and generally
configured through the Setup utility.
4.8.1 SECURITY FUNCTIONS
These systems include various features that provide different levels of security. Note that this
subsection describes only the hardware/firmware functionality (including that supported by
Setup) and does not describe security features that may be provided by Setup and/or the operating
system and application software.
4.8.1.1 System Passwords
This system supports two passwords; Setup and Power-On, either or both of which may be
enabled through Setup.
NOTE: The system hardware does not provide a CMOS-clearing feature, therefore
should both the Setup and Power-On password be lost or forgotten then a special utility
and BIOS function is required, allowing the use of a service password based on the unit
serial number and date. The utility can be invoked only as a network application
through Compaq Customer Support.
Setup Password
The Setup password is enabled and entered through the Setup utility. Once set, any changes
affected through Setup require the Setup password to be entered. Should the Setup password be
forgotten the Setup utility will be un-accessible for changes. Should the Power On password be
enabled but forgotten, the Setup password may be used to access the Setup utility and a new
Power On password be set.
Power On Password
The Power On password is enabled and set through the Setup utility. Once set, the boot sequence
can be completed only when the correct Power On password is entered.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-27
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
4.8.1.2 DriveLock Passwords
This system supports the DriveLock security feature for a compatible hard drive installed in the
Multibay. DriveLock, when enabled, prevents unauthorized access to hard drive data by requiring
a master and/or user password to be entered for access to data on the hard drive. Although this
function is configured through the Setup utility, the password information is stored in a reserved
area on the hard drive (i.e., the password(s) move(s) with the hard drive).
NOTE: The DriveLock feature is designed primarily for business environments,
especially where a removable Multibay hard drive(s) may be shared between several
systems. Since the loss of (forgetting) both DriveLock passwords to a drive will result in
that drive being unusable, it is strongly advised that this feature be invoked and
managed by a system administrator. For detailed user information consult the
appropriate user/reference guide for this system.
4.8.2 POWER MANAGEMENT
This system provides baseline hardware support of ACPI- and APM-compliant firmware and
software. Key power-consuming components (processor, chipset, I/O controller, and fan) can be
placed into a reduced power mode either automatically or by user control. The system can then be
brought back up (“wake-up”) by events defined by the ACPI specification. The ACPI wake-up
events supported by this system are listed as follows:
ACPI Wake-Up Event
Power Button
RTC Alarm
Wake On LAN (w/NIC)
PME
System Wakes From
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend or soft-off
Suspend only
Serial Port Ring
USB
Keyboard
Suspend only
Mouse
Suspend only
4.8.3 THERMAL SENSING AND COOLING
All systems feature a variable-speed fan (mounted as a part of the power supply assembly)
controlled by thermal sensing logic. All systems also include a header for connection to a fan
that may be included in some processor upgrade kits (known as “boxed processors”).
The system should be operated with all covers in place to ensure proper cooling of the system
board components.
4-28 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
4.9
SYSTEM I/O MAP
Table 4-20 lists the fixed addresses of the input/output (I/O) ports.
Table 4-20.
System I/O Map
I/O Port
Function
0000..000Fh
0020..0021h
0040..0043h
0060h
DMA Controller 1
Interrupt Controller 1
Timer 1
Keyboard Controller Data Byte
NMI, Speaker Control
0061h
0064h
0070h
0071h
Keyboard Controller Command/Status Byte
NMI Enable, RTC/Lower CMOS Index
RTC Data
0080..008Fh
0092h
DMA Page Registers
Port A, Fast A20/Reset
00A0..00A1h
00B2h, 00B3h
00C0..00DFh
0170..0177h
01F0..01FFh
0201..024Fh
0278..027Bh
02F8..02FFh
0371.. 0375h
0376h
Interrupt Controller 2
APM Control/Status Ports
DMA Controller 2
Hard Drive (IDE) Controller 2
Hard Drive (IDE) Controller 1
Audio subsystem control (primary & secondary addresses)
Parallel Port (LPT2)
Serial Port (COM2)
Diskette Drive Controller Alternate Addresses
IDE Controller Alternate Address
0377h
IDE Controller Alternate Address, Diskette Drive Controller Alternate Address
Parallel Port (LPT1)
FM synthesizer (alias addresses)
Graphics Controller
Serial Port (COM3)
Diskette Drive Controller Primary Addresses
Diskette Drive Controller Primary Addresses, Hard Drive Controller Primary Addresses
Serial Port (COM1)
Master, Slave Edge/Level INTR Control Register
PCI IRQ Mapping Index, Data
Reserved - Compaq proprietary use only
System Management Configuration Registers (Index, Data)
General Purpose Port
0378..037Fh
0388..038Bh
03B0..03DFh
03E8..03EFh
03F0..03F5h
03F6, 03F7h
03F8..03FFh
04D0, 04D1h
0C00, 0C01h
0C06, 0C07h
0C50, 0C51h
0C52h
0C7Ch
Machine ID
0CF8h
0CF9h
PCI Configuration Address (dword access only)
Reset Control Register
0CFCh
FF00..FF07h
PCI Configuration Data (byte, word, or dword access)
IDE Bus Master Register
NOTE: Assume unmarked gaps are reserved/unused.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 4-29
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 System Support
This page is intentionally blank.
4-30 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 5
INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACES
5.1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the standard (i.e., system board) interfaces that provide input and output
(I/O) porting of data and specifically discusses interfaces that are controlled through I/O-mapped
registers. The following I/O interfaces are covered in this chapter:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Enhanced IDE interface (5.2)
Diskette drive interface (5.3)
Serial interfaces (5.4)
page 5-1
page 5-4
page 5-5
page 5-8
page 5-15
page 5-22
page 5-26
page 5-32
Parallel interface (5.5)
Keyboard/pointing device interface (5.6)
Universal serial bus interface (5.7)
Audio subsystem (5.8)
Network support (5.9)
5.2
ENHANCED IDE INTERFACE
The enhanced IDE (EIDE) interface consists of primary and secondary controllers integrated into
the 82801 ICH component of the chipset. The system board includes two IDE connectors, a 40-
pin connector that is associated with the primary controller that controls the internal hard drive
and a 50-pin connector associated with the secondary controller that controls the device in the
Multibay. Each controller can be configured independently for the following modes of operation:
♦
♦
♦
Programmed I/O (PIO) mode – CPU controls drive transactions through standard I/O
mapped registers of the IDE drive.
8237 DMA mode – CPU offloads drive transactions using DMA protocol with transfer rates
up to 16 MB/s.
Ultra ATA/33 and /66 modes – Preferred bus mastering source-synchronous protocol
providing transfer rates of 33 and 66 MB/s respectively.
NOTE: Although the EIDE interface can electrically handle four EIDE devices, the
form factor of the unit chassis allows only two devices to be installed.
5.2.1 IDE PROGRAMMING
The IDE interface is configured as a PCI device during POST and controlled through I/O-
mapped registers at runtime.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
Hard drives types not found in the ROM’s parameter table are automatically configured as to
(soft)type by DOS as follows:
Primary controller: drive 0, type 65; drive 1, type 66
Secondary controller: drive 0, type 68; drive 1, type 15
Non-DOS (non-Windows) operating systems may require using Setup (F10) for drive
configuration.
5.2.1.1 IDE Configuration Registers
The IDE controller is configured as a PCI device with bus mastering capability. The PCI
configuration registers for the IDE controller function (PCI device #31, function #1) are listed in
Table 5-1.
Table 5-1.
EIDE PCI Configuration Registers (82801, Device 31/Function 1)
PCI Conf.
Addr.
00-01h
02-03h
04-05h
06-07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Dh
Reset
Value
8086h
2411h
0000h
0280h
00h
80h
01h
01h
0000h
80h
PCI Conf.
Addr.
24-2Bh
2C, 2Dh
2E, 2Fh
30-3Fh
40-43h
44h
48h
4A-4Bh
54h
F8-FBh
FC-FFh
--
Reset
Value
0’s
8086h
2411h
0’s
0000h
00h
00h
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
PCI Command
PCI Status
Revision ID
Programming
Sub-Class
Base Class Code
Master Latency Timer
Header Type
Reserved
Register
Reserved
Subsystem Vender ID
Subsystem ID
Reserved
Primary IDE Timing
Secondary IDE Timing
Sync. DMA Control
Sync. DMA Timing
EIDE I/O Config.Register
Manufacturer’s ID
Reserved
0000h
00h
0Eh
0F-1Fh
20-23h
00h
1h
BMIDE Base Address
--
--
NOTE:
Assume unmarked gaps are reserved and/or not used.
5.2.1.2 IDE Bus Master Control Registers
The IDE interface can perform PCI bus master operations using the registers listed in Table 5-2.
These registers occupy 16 bytes of variable I/O space set by software and indicated by PCI
configuration register 20h in the previous table.
Table 5-2.
IDE Bus Master Control Registers
I/O Addr.
Offset
00h
02h
04h
08h
0Ah
0Ch
Size
(Bytes)
Default
Value
00h
00h
0000 0000h
00h
Register
1
1
4
1
2
4
Bus Master IDE Command (Primary)
Bus Master IDE Status (Primary)
Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Pri.)
Bus Master IDE Command (Secondary)
Bus Master IDE Status (Secondary)
Bus Master IDE Descriptor Pointer (Sec.)
00h
0000 0000h
NOTE:
Unspecified gaps are reserved, will return indeterminate data, and should not be written to.
5-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.2.2 IDE CONNECTOR
This system uses a standard 40-pin connector for the primary IDE device and connects (via a
cable) to the hard drive installed in the right side drive bay. Note that some signals are re-defined
for UATA/33 and UATA/66 modes, which require a special 80-conductor cable (supplied)
designed to reduce cross-talk. Device power is supplied through a separate connector.
Figure 5-1. 40-Pin Primary IDE Connector (on system board).
Table 5-3.
40-Pin Primary IDE Connector Pinout
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal
RESET- Reset
Description
Pin
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Signal
DRQ
GND
IOW-
GND
Description
DMA Request
Ground
I/O Write [1]
Ground
I/O Read [2]
Ground
I/O Channel Ready [3]
Cable Select
DMA Acknowledge
Ground
Interrupt Request [4]
16-bit I/O
Address 1
Pass Diagnostics
Address 0
Address 2
GND
DD7
DD8
DD6
DD9
DD5
DD10
DD4
DD11
DD3
DD12
DD2
DD13
DD1
DD14
DD0
DD15
GND
--
Ground
Data Bit <7>
Data Bit <8>
Data Bit <6>
Data Bit <9>
Data Bit <5>
Data Bit <10>
Data Bit <4>
Data Bit <11>
Data Bit <3>
Data Bit <12>
Data Bit <2>
Data Bit <13>
Data Bit <1>
Data Bit <14>
Data Bit <0>
Data Bit <15>
Ground
IOR-
GND
IORDY
CSEL
DAK-
GND
IRQn
IO16-
DA1
DSKPDIAG
DA0
DA2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CS0-
CS1-
Chip Select
Chip Select
HDACTIVE- Drive Active (front panel LED) [5]
GND Ground
Key
NOTES:
[1] On UATA/33 and /66 modes, re-defined as STOP.
[2] On UATA/33 and /66 mode reads, re-defined as DMARDY-.
On UATA/33 and /66 mode writes, re-defined as STROBE.
[3] On UATA/33 and /66 mode reads, re-defined as STROBE-.
On UATA/33 and /66 mode writes, re-defined as DMARDY-.
[4] Primary connector wired to IRQ14, secondary connector wired to IRQ15.
[5] Pin 39 is used for spindle sync and drive activity (becomes SPSYNC/DACT-)
when synchronous drives are connected.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
The system board includes a 50-pin connector for the secondary IDE drive that is installed in the
MultiBay mounting position on the left side of the chassis. This interface includes power and
audio signals. The 50-pin system/daughter board connector is illustrated below followed by the
pinout.
P50
P2
P1
P49
Figure 5-2. 50-Pin Secondary IDE Connector (on system and daughter boards).
Table 5-4.
50-Pin Secondary IDE Connector Pinout
Pin
1
3
5
7
Signal
AUD L
AUD RTN
NC
RST
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
Description
Left channel audio
Audio return
Not connected
Reset
Data Bit <7>
Data Bit <6>
Data Bit <5>
Data Bit <4>
Data Bit <3>
Data Bit <2>
Data Bit <1>
Data Bit <0>
Ground
Data request
I/O write
I/O read
I/O channel ready
Acknowledge
Interrupt request 15
Address bit <1>
Address bit <0>
Chip select <1>
Activity
Pin
2
4
6
Signal
AUD R
AUD RTN
MBAY
GND
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
--
GND
GND
GND
P_ALE
GND
IO16
PDIAG
AD2
Description
Right channel audio
Audio return
Multibay device sense
Ground
Data Bit <8>
Data Bit <9>
Data Bit <10>
Data Bit <11>
Data Bit <12>
Data Bit <13>
Data Bit <14>
Data Bit <15>
(Key Space)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Cable select
Ground
16-bit I/O transfer
Diagnostic
Address bit <2>
Chip select <3>
Ground
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
D2
D1
D0
GND
DDRQ1
I/O W-
I/O R-
I/OCHRDY
ACK1-
IRQ15
AD1
AD0
CS1
ACT-
Vcc
CS3
GND
Vcc
+5 VDC
+5 VDC logic power
49
GND
Ground
50
NC
Not connected
5.3
DISKETTE DRIVE INTERFACE
NOTE: The Compaq iPAQ does not support a diskette drive. However, the LPC47B277
I/O controller contains a diskette drive controller that may need to be enabled (with
Setup) to satisfy the requirements of some operating systems. This will result in device
manager applications indicating the presence of a diskette drive that in fact is not
available.
5-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.4
SERIAL INTERFACE
The legacy-light models include a serial interface to transmit and receive asynchronous serial
data with external devices. The serial interface function is provided by the LPC47B277 I/O
controller component that includes a NS16C550-compatible UART.
NOTE: Legacy-free models do not have an externally accessible serial port, but do have
an internal serial header to satisfy the serial port requirements of some operating
systems.
The UART supports the standard baud rates up through 115200, and also special high speed
rates of 239400 and 460800 baud. The baud rate of the UART is typically set to match the
capability of the connected device. While most baud rates may be set at runtime, baud rates
230400 and 460800 must be set during the configuration phase.
5.4.1 RS-232 INTERFACE
On the legacy-light system, the UART is associated with a DB-9 connector that complies with
EIA standard RS-232-C. The DB-9 connector is shown in the following figure and the pinout of
the connector is listed in Table 5-5.
Figure 5-3. Serial Interface Connector (Male DB-9 as viewed from rear of chassis)
Table 5-5.
DB-9 Serial Connector Pinout
Pin
1
2
3
4
Signal
CD
RX Data
TX Data
DTR
Description
Pin
6
7
8
9
--
Signal
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
Description
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Ring Indicator
--
Carrier Detect
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Data Terminal Ready
Ground
5
GND
--
The standard RS-232-C limitation of 50 feet (or less) of cable between the DTE (computer) and
DCE (modem) should be followed to minimize transmission errors. Higher baud rates may
require shorter cables.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.4.2 SERIAL TEST INTERFACE
Legacy-free systems do not provide an externally accessible serial port but do include a serial
header connector on the system board to satisfy some the requirements of some operating
systems. The test header and pinout is shown in the following figure:
CD
1
2 DSR
RX Data 3
TX Data 5
DTR 7
4 RTS
6 CTS
8 RI
Gnd
9
Figure 5-4. Serial Interface Header (on legacy-free system board)
5.4.3 SERIAL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING
Programming the serial interfaces consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and
control, which occurs during runtime.
5.4.3.1 Serial Interface Configuration
The serial interface must be configured for a specific address range (COM1, COM2, etc.) and
also must be activated before it can be used. Address selection and activation of the serial
interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B277 I/O controller.
The serial interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:
Table 5-6.
Serial Interface Configuration Registers
Index
Address
30h
60h
61h
70h
Function
Activate
Base Address MSB
Base Address LSB
Interrupt Select
Mode Register
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
F0h
NOTE:
Refer to LPC47B277 data sheet for detailed register information.
5.4.3.2 Serial Interface Control
The BIOS function INT 14 provides basic control of the serial interface. The serial interface can
be directly controlled by software through the I/O-mapped registers listed in Table 5-7.
5-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table 5-7.
Serial Interface Control Registers
COM1
Addr.
3F8h
COM2
Addr.
2F8h
Register
Receive Data Buffer
Transmit Data Buffer
R/W
R
W
Baud Rate Divisor Register 0 (when bit 7 of Line Control Reg. Is set)
Baud Rate Divisor Register 1 (when bit 7 of Line Control Reg. Is set)
Interrupt Enable Register:
W
W
R/W
3F9h
2F9h
<7..4> Reserved (always 0’s)
<3> Modem status interrupt enable (active high) (CTS, DSR, RI, CD)
<2> Rx line status interrupt enable (active high) (Overrun, parity, framing error)
<1> Tx holding register empty interrupt enable (active high)
<0> Baud rate divisor interrupt enable (active high)
Interrupt ID Register:
3FAh
2FAh
R
<7,6> FIFO Enable/Disable: 0 = disable, 1 = enable
<5,4> Reserved
<3..1> Interrupt Source:
000 = Modem status
001 = TX holding reg. Empty
010 = RX data available
011 = RX line status
100,101 = Reserved
110 = Character time-out
111 = Reserved
<0> Interrupt pending (if cleared)
FIFO Control Register:
W
<7,6> RX Trigger Level: 00 = 1 byte, 01 = 4 bytes, 10 = 8 bytes, 11 = 14 bytes
<5..3> Rerserved
<2> TX FIFO reset (active high)
<1> RX FIFO reset (active high)
<0> FIFO Enable/Disable: 0 = Disable TX/RX FIFO’s, 1 = Enable TX/RX FIFO’s
Line Control Register:
3FBh
2FBh
R/W
<7> Register acces control:
0 = RX buffer, TX holding, divisor rate registers are accessable.
1 = Divisor rate register is accessable
<6> Break control (forces SOUT singla low if set)
<5> Stick parity (if set, even parity bit is 0, odd parity bit is 1)
<4> Parity type: 0 = odd, 1 = even
<3> Parity enable: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
<2> Stop bit: 0 = 1 stop bit, 1 = 2 stop bits
<1,0> Word size: 00 = 5 bits, 01 = 6 bits, 10 = 7 bits, 11 = 8 bits
Modem Control Register:
<7..5> Reserved
<4> Internal loopback enabled (if set)
<3> Serial I/F interrupts enabled (if set)
<2> Reserved
<1> RTS signal active (if set)
<0> DTR signal active (if set)
Line Status Register:
3FCh
3FDh
2FCh
2FDh
R/W
R
<7> Parity error, framing error, or Break condition (if set)
<6> TX holding and TX shift registers are empty (if set)
<5> TX holding register is empty (if set)
<4> Break interrupt has occurred (if set)
<3> Framing error has occurred (if set)
<2> Parity error has occurred (if set)
<1> Overrun error has occurred (if set)
<0> Data register ready to be read (if set)
Modem Status:
3FEh
2FEh
R
<7..4> DCD-, RI-, DSR, CTS (respectively) active (if set)
<3..0> DCD-, RI-, DSR, CTS (respectively) changed state since last read (if set)
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-7
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.5
PARALLEL INTERFACE
The legacy-light models include a parallel interface for connection to a peripheral device that has
a compatible interface, the most common being a printer. The parallel interface function is
integrated into theLPC47B277 I/O controller component and provides bi-directional 8-bit
parallel data transfers with a peripheral device. The parallel interface supports three main
modes of operation:
♦
♦
♦
Standard Parallel Port (SPP) mode
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) mode
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) mode
These three modes (and their submodes) provide complete support as specified for an IEEE 1284
parallel port.
5.5.1 STANDARD PARALLEL PORT MODE
The Standard Parallel Port (SPP) mode uses software-based protocol and includes two sub-modes
of operation, compatible and extended, both of which can provide data transfers up to 150 KB/s.
In the compatible mode, CPU write data is simply presented on the eight data lines. A CPU read
of the parallel port yields the last data byte that was written.
The following steps define the standard procedure for communicating with a printing device:
1. The system checks the Printer Status register. If the Busy, Paper Out, or Printer Fault signals
are indicated as being active, the system either waits for a status change or generates an error
message.
2. The system sends a byte of data to the Printer Data register, then pulses the printer STROBE
signal (through the Printer Control register) for at least 500 ns.
3. The system then monitors the Printer Status register for acknowledgment of the data byte
before sending the next byte.
In extended mode, a direction control bit (CTR 37Ah, bit <5>) controls the latching of output
data while allowing a CPU read to fetch data present on the data lines, thereby providing bi-
directional parallel transfers to occur.
The SPP mode uses three registers for operation: the Data register (DTR), the Status register
(STR) and the Control register (CTR). Address decoding in SPP mode includes address lines A0
and A1.
5-8 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.5.2 ENHANCED PARALLEL PORT MODE
In Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) mode, increased data transfers are possible (up to 2 MB/s) due
to a hardware protocol that provides automatic address and strobe generation. EPP revisions 1.7
and 1.9 are both supported. For the parallel interface to be initialized for EPP mode, a
negotiation phase is entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with
EPP mode. If compatible, then EPP mode can be used. In EPP mode, system timing is closely
coupled to EPP timing. A watchdog timer is used to prevent system lockup.
Five additional registers are available in EPP mode to handle 16- and 32-bit CPU accesses with
the parallel interface. Address decoding includes address lines A0, A1, and A2.
5.5.3 EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PORT MODE
The Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) mode, like EPP, also uses a hardware protocol-based
design that supports transfers up to 2 MB/s. Automatic generation of addresses and strobes as
well as Run Length Encoding (RLE) decompression is supported by ECP mode. The ECP mode
includes a bi-directional FIFO buffer that can be accessed by the CPU using DMA or
programmed I/O. For the parallel interface to be initialized for ECP mode, a negotiation phase is
entered to detect whether or not the connected peripheral is compatible with ECP mode. If
compatible, then ECP mode can be used.
Ten control registers are available in ECP mode to handle transfer operations. In accessing the
control registers, the base address is determined by address lines A2-A9, with lines A0, A1, and
A10 defining the offset address of the control register. Registers used for FIFO operations are
accessed at their base address + 400h (i.e., if configured for LPT1, then 378h + 400h = 778h).
The ECP mode includes several sub-modes as determined by the Extended Control register. Two
submodes of ECP allow the parallel port to be controlled by software. In these modes, the FIFO
is cleared and not used, and DMA and RLE are inhibited.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-9
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.5.4 PARALLEL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING
Programming the parallel interface consists of configuration, which typically occurs during
POST, and control, which occurs during runtime.
5.5.4.1 Parallel Interface Configuration
The parallel interface must be configured for a specific address range (LPT1, LPT2, etc.) and
also must be enabled before it can be used. When configured for EPP or ECP mode, additional
considerations must be taken into account. Address selection, enabling, and EPP/ECP mode
parameters of the parallel interface are affected through the PnP configuration registers of the
LPC47B347 I/O controller. Address selection and enabling are automatically done by the BIOS
during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility and other software.
The parallel interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:
Table 5-8.
Parallel Interface Configuration Registers
Index
Address
30h
60h
61h
70h
74h
F0h
F1h
Reset
Value
00h
00h
00h
00h
04h
00h
00h
Function
Activate
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Base Address MSB
Base Address LSB
Interrupt Select
DMA Channel Select
Mode Register
Mode Register 2
5-10 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.5.4.2 Parallel Interface Control
The BIOS function INT 17 provides simplified control of the parallel interface. Basic functions
such as initialization, character printing, and printer status are provide by subfunctions of INT
17. The parallel interface is controllable by software through a set of I/O mapped registers. The
number and type of registers available depends on the mode used (SPP, EPP, or ECP). Table 5-9
lists the parallel registers and associated functions based on mode.
Table 5-9.
Parallel Interface Control Registers
I/O
SPP Mode EPP Mode ECP Mode
Address
Base
Register
Data
Printer Status
Control
Address
Data Port 0
Data Port 1
Data Port 2
Data Port 3
Parallel Data FIFO
ECP Data FIFO
Test FIFO
Configuration Register A
Configuration Register B
Extended Control Register
Ports
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
Ports
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
LPT1,2
--
Ports
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
--
Base + 1h
Base + 2h
Base + 3h
Base + 4h
Base + 5h
Base + 6h
Base + 7h
Base + 400h
Base + 400h
Base + 400h
Base + 400h
Base + 401h
Base + 402h
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
LPT1,2,3
--
--
--
--
--
Base Address:
LPT1 = 378h
LPT2 = 278h
LPT3 = 3BCh
The following paragraphs describe the individual registers. Note that only the LPT1-based
addresses are given in these descriptions.
Data Register, I/O Port 378h
Data written to this register is presented to the data lines D0-D7. A read of this register when in
SPP-compatible mode yields the last byte written. A read while in SPP-extended or ECP mode
yields the status of data lines D0-D7 (i.e., receive data).
In ECP mode in the forward (output) direction, a write to this location places a tagged command
byte into the FIFO and reads have no effect.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-11
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
Status Register, I/O Port 379h, Read Only
This register contains the current printer status. Reading this register clears the interrupt
condition of the parallel port.
Bit
7
Function
Printer Busy (if 0)
6
5
4
3
Printer Acknowledgment Of Data Byte (if 0)
Printer Out Of Paper (if 1)
Printer Selected/Online (if 1)
Printer Error (if 0)
2
Reserved
1
0
EPP Interrupt Occurred (if set while in EPP mode)
EPP Timeout Occurred (if set while in EPP mode)
Control Register, I/O Port 37Ah
This register provides the printer control functions.
Bit
7,6
5
Function
Reserved
Direction Control for PS/2 and ECP Modes:
0 = Forward. Drivers enabled. Port writes to peripheral (default)
1 = Backward. Tristates drivers and data is read from peripheral
Acknowledge Interrupt Enable
0 = Disable ACK interrupt
4
1 = Enable interrupt on rising edge of ACK
3
2
1
0
Printer Select (if 0)
Printer Initialize (if 1)
Printer Auto Line Feed (if 0)
Printer Strobe (if 0)
Address Register, I/O Port 37Bh (EPP Mode Only)
This register is used for selecting the EPP register to be accessed.
Data Port Registers 0-3, I/O Ports 37C-Fh (EPP Mode Only)
These registers are used for reading/writing data. Port 0 is used for all transfers. Ports 1-3 are
used for transferring the additional bytes of 16- or 32-bit transfers through port 0.
5-12 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
FIFO Register, I/O Port 7F8h (ECP Mode Only)
While in ECP/forward mode, this location is used for filling the 16-byte FIFO with data bytes.
Reads have no effect (except when used in Test mode). While in ECP/backward mode, reads
yield data bytes from the FIFO.
Configuration Register A, I/O Port 7F8h (ECP Mode Only)
A read of this location yields 10h, while writes have no effect.
Configuration Register B, I/O Port 7F9h (ECP Mode, Read Only)
A read of this location yields the status defined as follows:
Bit
7
6
Function
Reserved (always 0)
Status of Selected IRQn.
Selected IRQ Indicator:
00 = IRQ7
5,4
11 = IRQ5
All other values invalid.
Reserved (always 1)
Reserved (always 000)
3
2..0
Extended Control Register B, I/O Port 7FAh (ECP ModeOnly)
This register defines the ECP mode functions.
Bit
Function
7..5
ECP Submode Select:
000 = Standard forward mode (37Ah <5> forced to 0). Writes are
controlled by software and FIFO is reset.
001 = PS/2 mode. Reads and writes are software controlled and
FIFO is reset.
010 = Parallel Port FIFO forward mode (37Ah <5> forced to 0). Writes are
hardware controlled.
011 = ECP FIFO mode. Direction determined by 37Ah, <5>. Reads and
writes are hardware controlled.
ECP Interrupt Mask:
0 = Interrupt is generated on ERR- assertion.
1 = Interrupt is inhibited.
ECP DMA Enable/Disable.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
ECP Interrupt Generation with DMA
0 = Enabled
4
3
2
1
0
1 = Disabled
FIFO Full Status (Read Only)
0 = Not full (at least 1 empty byte)
1 = Full
FIFO Empty Status (Read Only)
0 = Not empty (contains at least 1 byte)
1 = Empty
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-13
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.5.5 PARALLEL INTERFACE CONNECTOR
Figure 5-5 and Table 5-10 show the connector and pinout of the parallel interface connector.
Note that some signals are redefined depending on the port’s operational mode.
Figure 5-5. Parallel Interface Connector (Female DB-25 as viewed from rear of chassis)
Table 5-10.
DB-25 Parallel Connector Pinout
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal
STB-
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
Function
Strobe / Write [1]
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Pin
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
--
Signal
LF-
Function
Line Feed [2]
Error [3]
Initialize Paper [4]
Select In / Address. Strobe [1]
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
ERR-
INIT-
SLCTIN-
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
--
9
D7
Data 7
10
11
12
13
ACK-
BSY
PE
Acknowledge / Interrupt [1]
Busy / Wait [1]
Paper End / User defined [1]
Select / User defined [1]
Ground
Ground
Ground
--
SLCT
NOTES:
[1] Standard and ECP mode function / EPP mode function
[2] EPP mode function: Data Strobe
ECP modes: Auto Feed or Host Acknowledge
[3] EPP mode: user defined
ECP modes:Fault or Peripheral Req.
[4] EPP mode: Reset
ECP modes: Initialize or Reverse Req.
5-14 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.6
KEYBOARD/POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE
The legacy-light models include PS/2-type keyboard/pointing device interfaces for the connection
of a standard enhanced keyboard and a mouse. (Legacy-free models use USB ports for
keyboard/mouse connections.) The keyboard/pointing device interface function is provided by the
LPC47B277 I/O controller component, which integrates 8042-compatible keyboard controller
logic (hereafter referred to as simply the “8042”) to communicate with the keyboard and pointing
device using bi-directional serial data transfers. The 8042 handles scan code translation and
password lock protection for the keyboard as well as communications with the pointing device.
This section describes the interface itself. The keyboard is discussed in the Appendix C.
5.6.1 KEYBOARD INTERFACE OPERATION
The data/clock link between the 8042 and the keyboard is uni-directional for Keyboard Mode 1
and bi-directional for Keyboard Modes 2 and 3. (These modes are discussed in detail in
Appendix C). This section describes Mode 2 (the default) mode of operation.
Communication between the keyboard and the 8042 consists of commands (originated by either
the keyboard or the 8042) and scan codes from the keyboard. A command can request an action
or indicate status. The keyboard interface uses IRQ1 to get the attention of the CPU.
The 8042 can send a command to the keyboard at any time. When the 8042 wants to send a
command, the 8042 clamps the clock signal from the keyboard for a minimum of 60 us. If the
keyboard is transmitting data at that time, the transmission is allowed to finish. When the 8042 is
ready to transmit to the keyboard, the 8042 pulls the data line low, causing the keyboard to
respond by pulling the clock line low as well, allowing the start bit to be clocked out of the 8042.
The data is then transferred serially, LSb first, to the keyboard (Figure 5-6). An odd parity bit is
sent following the eighth data bit. After the parity bit is received, the keyboard pulls the data line
low and clocks this condition to the 8042. When the keyboard receives the stop bit, the clock line
is pulled low to inhibit the keyboard and allow it to process the data.
D1
0
D2
1
D3
1
D4
0
D5
1
D6
1
Parity
1
Start
Bit
0
D0
(LSb)
1
D7
(MSb)
1
Stop
Bit
0
Data
Clock
Tcy
Tcl Tch
Parameter
Tss Tsh
Th
Minimum Maximum
Tcy (Cycle Time)
Tcl (Clock Low)
Tch (Clock High)
Th (Data Hold)
Tss (Stop Bit Setup) 8 us
Tsh (Stop Bit Hold) 15 us
0 us
25 us
25 us
0 us
80 us
35 us
45 us
25 us
20 us
25 us
Figure 5-6. 8042-To-Keyboard Transmission of Code EDh, Timing Diagram
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-15
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
Control of the data and clock signals is shared by the 8042and the keyboard depending on the
originator of the transferred data. Note that the clock signal is always generated by the keyboard.
After the keyboard receives a command from the 8042, the keyboard returns an ACK code. If a
parity error or timeout occurs, a Resend command is sent to the 8042.
Table 5-11 lists and describes commands that can be issued by the 8042 to the keyboard.
Table 5-11.
8042-To-Keyboard Commands
Command
Value
Description
Set/Reset Status Indicators
EDh
Enables LED indicators. Value EDh is followed by an option
byte that specifies the indicator as follows:
Bits <7..3> not used
Bit <2>, Caps Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)
Bit <1>, NUM Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)
Bit <0>, Scroll Lock (0 = off, 1 = on)
Keyboard returns EEh when previously enabled.
Echo
EEh
Invalid Command
Select Alternate Scan Codes
EFh/F1h These commands are not acknowledged.
F0h
Instructs the keyboard to select another set of scan codes
and sends an option byte after ACK is received:
01h = Mode 1
02h = Mode 2
03h = Mode 3
Read ID
F2h
F3h
Instructs the keyboard to stop scanning and return two
keyboard ID bytes.
Instructs the keyboard to change typematic rate and delay
to specified values:
Set Typematic Rate/Display
Bit <7>, Reserved - 0
Bits <6,5>, Delay Time
00 = 250 ms
01 = 500 ms
10 = 750 ms
11 = 1000 ms
Bits <4..0>, Transmission Rate:
00000 = 30.0 ms
00001 = 26.6 ms
00010 = 24.0 ms
00011 = 21.8 ms
:
11111 = 2.0 ms
Enable
F4h
F5h
F6h
Instructs keyboard to clear output buffer and last typematic
key and begin key scanning.
Resets keyboard to power-on default state and halts
scanning pending next 8042 command.
Resets keyboard to power-on default state and enable
scanning.
Default Disable
Set Default
Set Keys - Typematic
Set Keys - Make/Brake
Set Keys - Make
Set Keys - Typematic/Make/Brake
Set Type Key - Typematic
Set Type Key - Make/Brake
Set Type Key - Make
Resend
F7h
F8h
F9h
FAh
FBh
FCh
FDh
FEh
FFh
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and sets default scan code set. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]
Clears keyboard buffer and prepares to receive key ID. [1]
8042 detected error in keyboard transmission.
Resets program, runs keyboard BAT, defaults to Mode 2.
Reset
Note:
[1] Used in Mode 3 only.
5-16 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.6.2 POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE OPERATION
The pointing device (typically a mouse) connects to a 6-pin DIN-type connector that is identical
to the keyboard connector both physically and electrically. The operation of the interface (clock
and data signal control) is the same as for the keyboard. The pointing device interface uses the
IRQ12 interrupt.
5.6.3 KEYBOARD/POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE PROGRAMMING
Programming the keyboard interface consists of configuration, which occurs during POST, and
control, which occurs during runtime.
5.6.3.1 8042 Configuration
The keyboard/pointing device interface must be enabled and configured for a particular speed
before it can be used. Enabling and speed parameters of the 8042 logic are affected through the
PnP configuration registers of the LPC47B347 I/O controller. Enabling and speed control are
automatically set by the BIOS during POST but can also be accomplished with the Setup utility
and other software.
The keyboard interface configuration registers are listed in the following table:
Table 5-12.
Keyboard Interface Configuration Registers
Index
Address
30h
70h
72h
F0h
Function
Activate
Primary Interrupt Select
Secondary Interrupt Select
Reset and A20 Select
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-17
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.6.3.2 8042 Control
The BIOS function INT 16 is typically used for controlling interaction with the keyboard. Sub-
functions of INT 16 conduct the basic routines of handling keyboard data (i.e., translating the
keyboard’s scan codes into ASCII codes). The keyboard/pointing device interface is accessed by
the CPU through I/O mapped ports 60h and 64h, which provide the following functions:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Output buffer reads
Input buffer writes
Status reads
Command writes
Ports 60h and 64h can be accessed using the IN instruction for a read and the OUT instruction
for a write. Prior to reading data from port 60h, the “Output Buffer Full” status bit (64h, bit <0>)
should be checked to ensure data is available. Likewise, before writing a command or data, the
“Input Buffer Empty” status bit (64h, bit <1>) should also be checked to ensure space is
available.
I/O Port 60h
I/O port 60h is used for accessing the input and output buffers. This register is used to send and
receive data from the keyboard and the pointing device. This register is also used to send the
second byte of multi-byte commands to the 8042 and to receive responses from the 8042 for
commands that require a response.
A read of 60h by the CPU yields the byte held in the output buffer. The output buffer holds data
that has been received from the keyboard and is to be transferred to the system.
A CPU write to 60h places a data byte in the input byte buffer and sets the CMD/ DATA bit of
the Status register to DATA. The input buffer is used for transferring data from the system to the
keyboard. All data written to this port by the CPU will be transferred to the keyboard except
bytes that follow a multibyte command that was written to 64h
I/O Port 64h
I/O port 64h is used for reading the status register and for writing commands. A read of 64h by
the CPU will yield the status byte defined as follows:
Bit
7..4
3
Function
General Purpose Flags.
CMD/DATA Flag (reflects the state of A2 during a CPU write).
0 = Data
1 = Command
2
1
General Purpose Flag.
Input Buffer Full. Set (to 1) upon a CPU write. Cleared by
IN A, DBB instruction.
0
Output Buffer Full (if set). Cleared by a CPU read of the buffer.
A CPU write to I/O port 64h places a command value into the input buffer and sets the
CMD/DATA bit of the status register (bit <3>) to CMD.
5-18 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table 5-13 lists the commands that can be sent to the 8042 by the CPU. The 8042 uses IRQ1 for
gaining the attention of the CPU.
Table 5-13.
CPU Commands To The 8042
Value
20h
Command Description
Put current command byte in port 60h.
60h
Load new command byte. This is a two-byte operation described as follows:
1. Write 60h to port 64h.
2. Write the command byte to port 60h as follows:
Bit <7> Reserved
<6> Keyboard Code Conversion
0 = Do not convert codes
1 = Convert codes to 9-bit 8088/8086-compatible format
Bit <5> Pointing Device Enable
0 = Enable pointing device
1 = Disable pointing device
Bit <4> Keyboard Enable
0 = Enable keyboard
1 = Disable keyboard
Bit <3> Reserved
Bit <2> System Flag
0 = Cold boot
1 = CPU reset (exit from protected mode)
Bit <1> Pointing Device Interrupt Enable
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
Bit <0> Keyboard Interrupt Enable
0 = Disable interrupt
1 = Enable interrupt
A4h
A5h
Test password installed. Tests whether or not a password is installed in the 8042:
If FAh is returned, password is installed.
If F1h is returned, no password is installed.
Load password. This multi-byte operation places a password in the 8042 using the following manner:
1. Write A5h to port 64h.
2. Write each character of the password in 9-bit scan code (translated) format to port 60h.
3. Write 00h to port 60h.
A6h
A7h
A8h
A9h
Enable security. This command places the 8042 in password lock mode following the A5h command.
The correct password must then be entered before further communication with the 8042 is allowed.
Disable pointing device. This command sets bit <5> of the 8042 command byte, pulling the clock line
of the pointing device interface low.
Enable pointing device. This command clears bit <5> of the 8042 command byte, activating the clock
line of the pointing device interface.
Test the clock and data lines of the pointing device interface and place test results in the output buffer.
00h = No error detected
01h = Clock line stuck low
02h = Clock line stuck high
03h = Data line stuck low
04h = Data line stuck high
AAh
ABh
Initialization. This command causes the 8042 to inhibit the keyboard and pointing device and places
55h into the output buffer.
Test the clock and data lines of the keyboard interface and place test results in the output buffer.
00h = No error detected
01h = Clock line stuck low
02h = Clock line stuck high
03h = Data line stuck low
04h = Data line stuck high
ADh
AEh
Disable keyboard command (sets bit <4> of the 8042 command byte).
Enable keyboard command (clears bit <4> of the 8042 command byte).
Continued
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-19
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
Table 5-13. CPU Commands To The 8042 (Continued)
Value
Command Description
C0h
Read input port of the 8042. This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the input port
to the output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h. The contents are as follows:
Bit <7> Password Enable:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit <6> External Boot Enable:
0 = Enabled
1 = Disabled
Bit <5> Setup Enable:
0 = Enabled
1 = Disabled
Bit <4> VGA Enable:
0 = Enabled
1 = Disabled
Bit <3> Diskette Writes:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Bit <2> Reserved
Bit <1> Pointing Device Data Input Line
Bit <0> Keyboard Data Input Line
C2h
C3h
D0h
Poll Input Port High. This command directs the 8042 to place bits <7..4> of the input port into the
upper half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received.
Poll Input Port Low. This command directs the 8042 to place bits <3..0> of the input port into the lower
half of the status byte on a continous basis until another command is received.
Read output port. This command directs the 8042 to transfer the contents of the output port to the
output buffer so that they can be read at port 60h. The contents are as follows:
Bit <7> Keyboard data stream
Bit <6> Keyboard clock
Bit <5> IRQ12 (pointing device interrupt)
Bit <4> IRQ1 (keyboard interrupt)
Bit <3> Pointing device clock
Bit <2> Pointing device data
Bit <1> A20 Control:
0 = Hold A20 low
1 = Enable A20
Bit <0> Reset Line Status;
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
D1h
D2h
Write output port. This command directs the 8042 to place the next byte written to port 60h into the
output port (only bit <1> can be changed).
Echo keyboard data. Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port 60h as if
it originated from the keyboard. No 11-to-9 bit translation takes place but an interrupt (IRQ1) is
generated if enabled.
D3h
Echo pointing device data. Directs the 8042 to send back to the CPU the next byte written to port 60h
as if it originated from the pointing device. An interrupt (IRQ12) is generated if enabled.
Write to pointing device. Directs the 8042 to send the next byte written to 60h to the pointing device.
Read test inputs. Directs the 8042 to transfer the test bits 1 and 0 into bits <1,0> of the output buffer.
Pulse output port. Controls the pulsing of bits <3..0> of the output port (0 = pulse, 1 = don’t pulse).
Note that pulsing bit <0> will reset the system.
D4h
E0h
F0h-
FFh
5-20 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.6.4 KEYBOARD/POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE CONNECTOR
The legacy-light model provides separate PS/2 connectors for the keyboard and pointing device.
Both connectors are identical both physically and electrically. Figure 5-7 and Table 5-14 show
the connector and pinout of the keyboard/pointing device interface connectors.
Figure 5-7. Keyboard or Pointing Device Interface Connector
(as viewed from rear of chassis)
Table 5-17.
Keyboard/Pointing Device Connector Pinout
Pin
1
2
Signal
DATA
NC
Description
Data
Not Connected
Ground
Pin
4
5
6
Signal
+ 5 VDC
CLK
Description
Power
Clock
3
GND
NC
Not Connected
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-21
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.7
UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS INTERFACE
The Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface provides asynchronous/isochronous data transfers of up
to 12 Mb/s with compatible peripherals such as keyboards, printers, or modems. This high-speed
interface supports hot-plugging of compatible devices, making possible system configuration
changes without powering down or even rebooting systems.
NOTE: It is recommended to run the Windows 98 (or later) operating system when
using USB peripherals, especially a USB keyboard and USB mouse. Problems may be
encountered when using USB devices with a system running Windows 95, although
some peripherals (such as a modem and/or a camera) may operate satisfactorily.
As shown in Figure 5-8, the USB interface is provided by the 82801 ICH component and a USB
hub component. All models provide two front-panel accessible series-A USB ports. The legacy-
free system provides three additional series-A USB ports on the rear panel.
NOTE: For more information on the USB interface refer to the following web site:
http://www.usb.org
Rear Panel
Tx/Rx Data
USB Port 0
USB Port 1
USB Port 2
82801
ICH
USB
I/F
Tx/Rx Data
USB
Hub
Front Panel
USB Port 3
USB Port 4
Legacy-free systems only
Figure 5-8. USB I/F, Block Diagram
5.7.1 USB DATA FORMATS
The USB I/F uses non-return-to-zero inverted (NRZI) encoding for data transmissions, in which
a 1 is represented by no change (between bit times) in signal level and a 0 is represented by a
change in signal level. Bit stuffing is employed prior to NRZ1 encoding so that in the event a
string of 1’s is transmitted (normally resulting in a steady signal level) a 0 is inserted after every
six consecutive 1’s to ensure adequate signal transitions in the data stream.
5-22 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
The USB transmissions consist of packets using one of four types of formats (Figure 5-9) that
include two or more of seven field types.
♦
♦
Sync Field – 8-bit field that starts every packet and is used by the receiver to align the
incoming signal with the local clock.
Packet Identifier (PID) Field – 8-bit field sent with every packet to identify the attributes (in.
out, start-of-frame (SOF), setup, data, acknowledge, stall, preamble) and the degree of error
correction to be applied.
♦
♦
Address and Endpint Fields – 7- and 4-bit fields (respectively) that provide
source/destination information required in token packets.
Frame Field – 11-bit field sent in Start-of-Frame (SOF) packets that are incremented by the
host and sent only at the start of each frame.
♦
♦
Data Field – 0-1023-byte field of data.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Field – 5- or 16-bit field used to check transmission
integrity.
Sync Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
Addr. Field
(7 bits)
ENDP. Field
(4 bits)
CRC Field
(5 bits)
Token Packet
SOF Packet
Sync Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
Frame Field
(11 bits)
CRC Field
(5 bits)
Sync Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
Data Field
(0-1023 bytes)
CRC Field
(16 bits)
Data Packet
Sync Field
(8 bits)
PID Field
(8 bits)
Handshake Packet
Figure 5-9. USB Packet Formats
Data is transferred LSb first. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is applied to all packets (except a
handshake packet). A packet causing a CRC error is generally completely ignored by the
receiver.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-23
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.7.2 USB PROGRAMMING
Programming the USB interface consists of configuration, which typically occurs during POST,
and control, which occurs at runtime.
5.7.2.1 USB Configuration
The USB interface functions as a PCI device (31) within the 82801 component (function 2) and
is configured using PCI Configuration Registers as listed in Table 5-15.
Table 5-15.
USB Interface Configuration Registers
PCI Config.
Addr.
00, 01h
02, 03h
04, 05h
06, 07h
08h
Reset
Value
8086h
2412h
0000h
0280h
00h
PCI Config.
Addr.
0Dh
0Eh
20-23h
3Ch
Reset
Value
00h
00h
1h
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
PCI Command
PCI Status
Register
Latency Timer
Header Type
I/O Space Base Address
Interrupt Line
00h
04h
Revision ID
3Dh
Interrupt Pin
09h
0Ah
0Bh
Programming I/F
Sub Class Code
Base Class Code
00h
03h
0Ch
60h
C0, C1h
C4h
Miscellaneous Control 1
Miscellaneous Control 2
USB Resume Enable
10h
2000h
00h
5.7.2.2 USB Control
The USB is controlled through I/O registers as listed in table 5-16.
Table 5-16.
USB Control Registers
I/O Addr.
00, 01h
02, 03h
04, 05h
06, 07
08, 0B
0Ch
10, 11h
12, 13h
18h
Register
Command
Status
Interupt Enable
Frame Number
Frame List Base Address
Start of Frame Modify
Port 1 Status/Control
Port 2 Status/Control
Test Data
Default Value
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
0000h
40h
0080h
0080h
00h
5-24 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.7.3 USB CONNECTOR
The USB interface provides two series-A connectors on the front panel and, on legacy-free
models, three series-A USB connectors on the rear panel.
1
2
3
4
Figure 5-10. Universal Serial Bus Connector
Table 5-17.
USB Connector Pinout
Pin
1
2
Signal
Vcc
USB-
Description
+5 VDC
Data (minus)
Pin
3
4
Signal
USB+
GND
Description
Data (plus)
Ground
5.7.4 USB CABLE DATA
The recommended cable length between the host and the USB device should be no longer than
sixteen feet for full-channel (12 MB/s) operation, depending on cable specification (see following
table).
Table 5-18.
USB Cable Length Data
Conductor Size
20 AWG
Resistance
0.036 Ω
0.057 Ω
0.091 Ω
0.145 Ω
0.232 Ω
Maximum Length
16.4 ft (5.00 m)
9.94 ft (3.03 m)
6.82 ft (2.08 m)
4.30 ft (1.31 m)
2.66 ft (0.81 m)
22 AWG
24 AWG
26 AWG
28 AWG
NOTE:
For sub-channel (1.5 MB/s) operation and/or when using sub-standard cable
shorter lengths may be allowable and/or necessary.
The shield, chassis ground, and power ground should be tied together at the host end but left
unconnected at the device end to avoid ground loops.
Color code:
Signal
Data +
Data -
Vcc
Insulation color
Green
White
Red
Ground Black
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-25
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.8
AUDIO SUBSYSTEM
A PCI audio subsystem is integrated onto the system board of the Compaq iPAQ. Implementing
AC’97 design guidelines, the audio subsystem is designed to provide optimum sound. Key
features of the audio subsystem include:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
AC’97 ver. 2.1 compliance
Multiple audio channel streaming
Soft CD, DVD/AC-3 processing
Wavetable synthesis utilizing system memory
Acoustic echo cancellation
16-bit stereo PCM input and output w/ up to 48 KHz sampling
5.8.1 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS
A block diagram of the audio subsystem is shown in Figure 5-11. The architecture uses the
AC’97 Audio Controller of the 82801 ICH component to access and control an Analog Devices
AD1881 Audio Codec, which provides the analog-to-digital (ADC) and digital-to-analog (DAC)
conversions as well as the mixing functions.
All control functions such as volume, audio source selection, and sampling rate are controlled
through software over the PCI bus through the AC97 Audio Controller of the 82801 ICH.
Control data and digital audio streams (record and playback) are transferred between the Audio
Controller and the Audio Codec over the AC97 Link Bus. Playback audio from the Audio Codec
is routed to a 5-watt low-distortion amplifier (TDA7056A) that drives a long-excursion large-
magnet speaker for optimum sound.
The analog interfaces allowing connection to external audio devices are discussed in the
following paragraphs.
Mic In - This front panel-accessible input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is
specifically designed for connection of a condenser microphone with an impedance of 10-K
ohms. This is the default recording input after a system reset.
Line In - This input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack that is specifically designed for
connection of a high-impedance (10k-ohm) audio source such as a tape deck.
Headphones Out - This front panel-accessible input uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack
that is specifically designed for connecting a set of 16-ohm (nom.) stereo headphones. Plugging
into the Headphones jack mutes the signal to the internal speaker and the Line Out jack.
Line Out - This output uses a three-conductor (stereo) mini-jack for connecting left and right
channel line-level signals (20-K ohm impedance). A typical connection would be to a tape
recorder’s Line In (Record In) jacks, an amplifier’s Line In jacks, or to “powered” speakers that
contain amplifiers. Plugging into the Line Out mutes the internal speaker.
5-26 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
PC Beep Audio
Reset
82801 ICH
SD OUT
SD IN
PCI Bus
AC’97
Audio
Cntlr.
SYNC
BIT_CLK
AC97
Link Bus
Audio
Bias
Mic In
Internal
Speaker
PB Audio
(L/R)
(L)
+
TDA
7056
AD1881
Audio
Codec
Line In
(R)
-
CD
Audio (L)
CD
Audio (R)
CD ROM
(L)
(R)
Line
Out
(L)
(R)
Headphones
Out
Figure 5-11. Audio Subsystem Functional Block Diagram
Legacy beep audio originates from the 82801 ICH and is applied to the output amplifier,
bypassing the audio codec so that basic support of beep codes produced during POST is
maintained.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-27
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.8.2 AC97 AUDIO CONTROLLER
The AC97 Audio Controller is a PCI device (device 31/function 5) that is integrated into the
82801 ICH component and supports the following functions:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Read/write access to audio codec registers
16-bit stereo PCM output @ up to 48 KHz sampling
16-bit stereo PCM input @ up to 48 KHz sampling
Acoustic echo correction for microphone
AC’97 Link Bus
ACPI power management
5.8.3 AC97 LINK BUS
The audio controller and the audio codec communicate over a five-signal AC97 Link Bus (Figure
5-12). The AC97 Link Bus includes two serial data lines (SD OUT/SD IN) that transfer control
and PCM audio data serially to and from the audio codec using a time-division multiplexed
(TDM) protocol. The data lines are qualified by a 12.288 MHz BIT_CLK signal driven by the
audio codec. Data is transferred in frames synchronized by the 48-KHz SYNC signal, which is
derived from the clock signal and driven by the audio controller. The SYNC signal is high during
the frame’s tag phase then falls during T17and remains low during the data phase. A frame
consists of one 16-bit tag slot followed by twelve 20-bit data slots. When asserted (typically
during a power cycle), the RESET- signal (not shown) will reset all audio registers to their
default values.
T1
T2
T3
T18
T19
T38
T39
T58
BIT_CLK
(12.288 MHz)
SYNC
(48 KHz)
Codec
Ready
SD OUT
or SD IN
Bit 15 Bit 14
it 0 Bit 19 Bit 18
it 0 Bit 19 Bit 18
it 0 Bit 19
Slot 0
(Tag)
Slot 1
(Data)
Slot 2
(Data)
Slot
Description
0
Bit 15: Frame valid bit
Bits 14-3: Slots 1-12 valid bits
Bits 2-0: Codec ID
1
2
3
Command address: Bit 19, R/W; Bits 18..12, reg. Index; Bits 11..0, reserved.
Command data
Bits 19-4: PCM audio data, left channel (SD OUT, playback; SD IN, record)
Bits 3-0 all zeros
4
Bits 19-4: PCM audio data, right channel (SD OUT, playback; SD IN, record)
Bits 3-0 all zeros
5
Modem codec data (not used in this system)
6-11
12
Reserved
I/O control
Figure 5-12. AC’97 Link Bus Protocol
5-28 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.8.4 AUDIO CODEC
The audio codec provides pulse code modulation (PCM) coding and decoding of audio
information as well as the selection and/or mixing of analog channels. As shown in Figure 5-13,
analog audio from a microphone, tape, or CD can be selected and, if to be recorded (saved) onto a
disk drive, routed through an analog-to-digital converter (ADC). The resulting left and right
PCM record data are muxed into a time-division-multiplexed (TDM) data stream (SD IN signal)
that is routed to the audio controller. Playback (PB) audio takes the reverse path from the audio
controller to the audio codec as SD OUT data and is decoded and processed by the digital-to-
analog converter (DAC). The codec supports simultaneous record and playback of stereo (left
and right) audio. The Sample Rate Generator may be set for sampling frequencies up to 48 KHz.
Analog audio may then be routed through 3D stereo enhancement processor or bypassed to the
output selector (SEL). The integrated analog mixer provides the computer control-console
functionality handling multiple audio inputs.
Audio
Format
Mic In
S
e
l
e
c
t
Rec
Data (L)
Left
Audio
Line In (L)
Line In (R)
Rec
Gain
ADC
ADC
SD IN
Rec
Data (R)
Right
Audio
Rec
Gain
CD In (L)
CD In (R)
o
r
AC97
Link
I/F
Sample
Rate
Gen.
Audio
Controller
Σ/Mixer
SW
PB
Data (L)
(L)
(L)
3D Proc.
3D Proc.
PB
Gain
(L)
DAC
DAC
Compaq
Premier
Sound
S
E
L
SD Out
PB
Data (R)
(R)
(R)
(R)
PB
Gain
Components
Figure 5-13. AD1881 Audio Codec Functional Block Diagram
All inputs and outputs are two-channel stereo except for the microphone input, which is inputted
as a single-channel but mixed internally onto both left and right channels. The microphone input
is the default active input. All block functions are controlled through index-addressed registers of
the codec.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-29
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.8.5 AUDIO PROGRAMMING
Audio subsystem programming consists configuration, typically accomplished during POST, and
control, which occurs during runtime. The register maps are described in the following
subsections.
5.8.5.1 Audio Configuration
The audio subsystem is configured according to PCI protocol through the AC’97 audio controller
function of the 82801 ICH. Table 5-19 lists the PCI configuration registers of the audio
subsystem.
Table 5-19.
AC’97 Audio Controller
PCI Configuration Registers (82801 Device 31/Function 5)
PCI
Value
on
PCI
Value
on
Reset
1h
1h
1h
0000h
0000h
0’s
00h
03h
0’s
Conf.
Addr.
00-01h
02-03h
04-05h
06-07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Eh
Conf.
Addr.
14-17h
18-1Bh
1C-2Bh
2C-2Dh
2E-2Fh
30-3Bh
3Ch
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
PCI Command
PCI Status
Revision ID
Programming
Sub-Class
Base Class Code
Header Type
Native Audio Mixer Base Addr.
Reset
8086h
2415h
0000h
0280h
xxh
01h
01h
04h
00h
Register
Native Audio Bus Mstr. Addr.
Reserved
Reserved
Subsystem Vender ID
Subsystem ID
Reserved
Interrupt Line
Interrupt Pin
Reserved
3Dh
3E-FFh
--
10-13h
1h
--
--
5.8.5.2 Audio Control
The audio subsystem is controlled through a set of indexed registers that physically reside in the
audio codec . The register addresses are decoded by the audio controller and forwarded to the
audio codec over the AC97 Link Bus previously described. The audio codec’s control registers
(Table 5-20) are mapped into 64 kilobytes of variable I/O space.
Table 5-20.
AC’97 Audio Codec Control Registers
Value
On
Value
On
Value
On
Offset
Offset
Offset
Addr. / Register
00h Reset
Reset
0100h
8000h
X
8000h
X
8000h
8008h
8008h
8808h
8808h
Addr. / Register
14h Video Vol.
16h Aux Vol.
Reset
8808h
8808h
8808h
0000h
8000h
X
0000h
0000h
X
Addr. / Register
28h Ext. Audio ID.
2Ah Ext. Audio Ctrl/Sts
2Ch PCM DAC SRate
32h PCM ADC SRate
34h Reserved
Reset
0001h
0000h
BB80h
BB80h
X
02h Master Vol.
04h Reserved
06h Mono Mstr. Vol.
08h Reserved
0Ah PC Beep Vol.
0Ch Phone In Vol.
0Eh Mic Vol.
18h PCM Out Vol.
1Ah Record Sel.
1Ch Record Gain
1Eh Reserved
20h Gen. Purpose
22h 3D Control
24h Reserved
26h Pwr Mgnt.
72h Reserved
X
74h Serial Config.
76h Misc. Control Bits
7Ch Vender ID1
7Eh Vender ID2
7x0xh
0404h
4144h
5340h
10h Line In Vol.
12h CD Vol.
000xh
5-30 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.8.6 AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications of the audio subsystem are listed in Table 5-21.
Table 5-21.
Audio Subsystem Specifications
Paramemter
Sampling Rate
Resolution
Measurement
5.51 KHz to 44 KHz
16 bit
Nominal Input Voltage:
Mic In (w/+20 db gain
Line In
.283 Vp-p
2.83 Vp-p
Impedance:
Mic In
Line In
Line Out
1 K ohms (nom)
10 K ohms (min)
800 ohms
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (input to Line Out)
Max. Power Output (into 8 ohms)
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) (to int. spkr):
@ 0.5 watts
90 db (nom)
5.2 watts
1 %
@ max. power output
Headphone Output Power (into 32 ohms)
Input Gain Attenuation Range
Master Volume Range
Frequency Response:
Codec
10 %
60 mW
46.5 db
-94.5 db
20-20 KHz
Speaker
450 - 4000 Hz
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-31
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.9
NETWORK INTERFACE CONTROLLER
The Compaq iPAQ includes a network interface controller (NIC) resident on the system board.
The NIC (Figure 5-14) includes the 82559 controller, two LED indicators, and support firmware.
The support firmware is contained in the system (BIOS) ROM. The NIC can operate in half- or
full-duplex modes, and provides auto-negotiation of both mode and speed. Half-duplex operation
features an Intel-proprietary collision reduction mechanism while full-duplex operation follows
the IEEE 802.3x flow control specification. Transmit and receive FIFOs of 3 kilobytes each
reduce the chance of overrun while waiting for bus access.
25 MHz
Clock
Circuitry
EEP/
ROM
RJ-45
Connector
CLK
Active/
Link
PCI Bus #1
SMBus
(Green)
82559
Ethernet
Controller
TX/RX
82801 ICH
Speed
(Yellow)
LED
Function
Green
Activity/Link: Indicates network activity and link pulse
reception.
Yellow
Speed: Indicates link detection in 100 MB/s mode
(always on if 100Base-Tx is forced).
Figure 5-14. 10/100 TX Network Interface Controller Block Diagram
The Intel 82559 Fast Ethernet Controller includes the following features:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Intel 82559 Fast Ethernet controller with 32-bit architecture and 3-KB TX/RX buffers.
Dual-mode support with auto-switching between 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX.
Power down and Wake up support in both APM and ACPI environments (PME- and WOL).
Alert-on-LAN (AOL v1.0) support.
Dual control (PCI and SM bus interfaces).
Link and Activity LED indicator drivers
The 82559 controller features high and low priority queues and provides priority-packet
processing for networks that can support that feature. The controller’s micro-machine processes
transmit and receive frames independently and concurrently. Receive runt (under-sized) frames
are not passed on as faulty data but discarded by the controller, which also directly handles such
errors as collision detection or data under-run. An EEPROM, accessed by the 82559 controller
over a serial interface, is used to store identification, configuration and connection parameters.
The NIC uses 3.3 VDC auxiliary power, which allows the 82559 controller to support Wake-On-
LAN (WOL) and Alert-On-LAN (AOL) functions while the main system is powered down.
5-32 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
NOTE: For the WOL and AOL features to function as described in the following
paragraphs, the system unit must be plugged into a live AC outlet. Controlling unit
power through a switchable power strip will, with the strip turned off, disable WOL and
AOL functionality.
5.9.1 WAKE ON LAN
The 82559 NIC supports the Wired-for-Management (WfM) standard of Wake-On-LAN (WOL)
that allows the system to be booted up from a powered down condition upon the detection of
special packets received over a network. The NIC component receives 3.3 VDC auxiliary power
while the system unit is powered down in order to process special packets. The detection of a
Magic Packet by the 82559 NIC results in the PME- signal on the PCI bus to be asserted,
initiating system wake-up from an ACPI S1 or S3 state.
5.9.2 ALERT ON LAN
Alert-On-LAN (AOL) support allows the NIC to communicate the occurrence of certain events
over a network even while the system unit is powered off. In a system-off (powered down)
condition the 82801 ICH and the 82559 NIC components receive auxiliary +3.3 VDC power
(derived from the +5 VDC auxiliary power from the power supply assembly). Certain events
(listed in Table 5-22) detected by the 82801 ICH will result in the ICH generating an alert
message over the SMBus to the 82559 NIC. Upon receiving the alert message from the ICH the
NIC transmits the appropriate pre-constructed message over the network to a system
management console.
Reportable AOL events are listed in the following table:
Table 5-22.
AOL Events
Event
Description
BIOS Failure
System fails to boot successfully.
OS Problem
System fails to load operating system after POST.
Processor fails to fetch first instruction.
Thermal ASIC reports high temperature.
Indication of system’s network presence (sent approximately every 30
seconds in normal operation).
Missing/Faulty Processor
Thermal Condition
Heartbeat
The AOL implementation requirements are as follows:
1. Intel PRO/100+ Management Adapter driver 3.1x or later (available from Compaq).
2. Client-side utility agent software (available from Compaq).
3. Management console running one of the following:
a. HP OpenView Network Node Manager 6.x
b. Intel LANDesk Client Manager
c. Compaq Insight Manager
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-33
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.9.3 POWER MANAGEMENT SUPPORT
The 82559 controller features Wired-for-Management (WfM) support providing system wake up
from network events (WOL) as well as generating system status messages (AOL) and supports
both APM and ACPI power management environments. The controller receives 3.3 VDC
(auxiliary) power as long as the system is plugged into a live AC receptacle, allowing support of
wake-up events occuring over a network while the system is powered down or in a low-power
state.
5.9.3.1 APM Environment
The Advanced Power Management (APM) functionality of system wake up is implemented
through the system’s APM-compliant BIOS and the controller’s Magic Packet-compliant
hardware. This environment bypasses operating system (OS) intervention allowing a plugged in
unit to be turned on remotely over the network (i.e., “remote wake up”). In APM mode the
controller, will respond upon receiving a Magic Packet, which is a packet where the node’s
address is repeated 16 times. Upon Magic packet detection, the controller intitiates the boot
sequence.
5.9.3.2 ACPI Environment
The Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) functionality of system wake up is
implemented through an ACPI-compliant OS and is the default power management mode. The
following wakeup events may be individually enabled/disabled through the supplied software
driver:
♦
Magic Packet – Packet with node address repeated 16 times in data portion
NOTE: The following functions are supported in NDIS5 drivers but implemented through
remote management software applications (such as LanDesk).
♦
♦
♦
♦
Individual address match – Packet with matching user-defined byte mask
Multicast address match – Packet with matching user-defined sample frame
ARP (address resolution protocol) packet
Flexible packet filtering – Packets that match defined CRC signature
5-34 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
5.9.4 NIC PROGRAMMING
Programming the 82559 NIC controller consists of configuration, which occurs during POST,
and control, which occurs at runtime.
5.9.4.1 Configuration
The 82559 controller is a PCI device and configured though PCI configuration space registers
using PCI protocol described in chapter 4. The PCI configuration registers are listed in the
following table:
Table 5-23.
NIC Controller PCI Configuration Registers (82559 Device 2/Function 0)
PCI
Value
on
PCI
Conf.
Value
on
Reset
0000h
00h
Conf.
Addr.
00-01h
02-03h
04-05h
06-07h
08h
09-0Bh
0Ch
0Dh
Register
Vender ID
Device ID
Reset
8086h
1229h
0000h
0280h
xxh
01h
01h
04h
00h
Addr.
10-13h
14-17h
18-1Bh
2C-2Dh
2E-2Fh
30-33h
34h
Register
Cntrl. Reg. Base Addr. (Mem)
Cntrl. Reg. Base Addr. (I/O)
Flash Mem. Base Addr.
Subsystem Vender ID
Subsystem ID
Expansion ROM Base Addr.
Cap-Ptr
Interrupt Line/Pin
PCI Command
PCI Status
Revision ID
Class Code
Cache Line Size
Latency Timer
Header Type
BIST
00h
3C-3D
3E-3Fh
DC-E3h
0Eh
0Fh
Min Gnt/Max Lat
Power Mgmt. Functions
00h
NOTE:
Assume unmarked gaps are reserved and/or not used.
5.9.4.2 Control
The 82559 controller is controlled though registers that may be mapped in system memory space
or variable I/O space. The registers are listed in the following table:
Table 5-24.
NIC Control Registers
Offset
No. of
Offset
No. of
Addr. / Register
Bytes
Addr. / Register
Bytes
00h SCB Status
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
1
19h Flow Control Register
1Bh PMDR
1Ch General Control
1Dh General Status
2
1
1
1
10
4
4
4
4
02h SCB Command
04h SCB General Pointer
08h PORT
0Ch Flash Control Reg.
0Eh EEPROM Control Reg.
10h Mgmt. Data I/F Cntrl. Reg.
14h Rx Direct Mem. Access Byte Cnt.
18h Early Receive Interrupt
1E-2Fh Reserved
30h Function Event Register
34h Function Event Mask Register
38h Function Present State Register
20h Force Event Register
Not implemented in these systems (CardBus registers).
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 5-35
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Input/Output Interfaces
5.9.4.3 RJ-45 Connector
Figure 5-15 shows the RJ-45 connector used for the NIC interface. This connector includes the
two status LEDs as part of the connector assembly.
Activity LED
Speed LED
Pin
1
2
3
6
Description
Transmit+
Transmit-
Receive+
Receive-
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 5-15. Ethernet TPE Connector (RJ-45, viewed from card edge)
5.9.4.4 82559 NIC Specifications
Table 5-25.
82559 NIC Specifications
Parameter
Modes Supported
10BASE-T half duplex @ 10 MB/s
10Base-T full duplex @ 20 MB/s
100BASE-TX half duplex @ 100 MB/s
100Base-TX full duplex @ 200 MB/s
IEEE VLAN (802.1A)
IEEE 802.2
IEEE 802.3 & 802.3u
IEEE Intel priority packet (801.1p)
MS Windows 95,98, and 2000 beta
MS Windows NT 3.51 & 4.0
Novell Netware 3.11, 3.12, & 4.1x; 5 Server
Sunsoft Solaris
Standards Compliance
OS Driver Support
SCO UnixWare
Open Desktop
OpenServer
Boot ROM Support
F12 BIOS Support
Bus Inteface
Intel PRO/100 Boot Agent (PXE 2.0, RPL)
Yes
PCI 2.2
Power Management Support
APM, ACPI, PCI Power Management Spec.
5-36 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition – March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 6
GRAPHICS SUBSYSTEM
6.1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the graphics subsystem of the Compaq iPAQ Internet Device. The
82810e/DC-100 GMCH component integrates the equivalent of the Intel i740 graphics controller,
which employs the AGP interface allowing the use of system memory to provide efficient,
economical 2D and 3D performance.
This chapter covers the following subjects:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Functional description (6.2)
Display modes (6.3)
Upgrading (6.4)
Programming (6.5)
Monitor power mangement (6.6)
Monitor connector (6.7)
page 6-2
page 6-4
page 6-4
page 6-5
page 6-6
page 6-7
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 6-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Graphics Subsystem
6.2
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The Intel 810e chipset integrates the equivalent of an Intel i740 graphics controller into the
GMCH component (Figure 6-1).
82810e/DC-100 GMCH
FSB
I/F
4 MB SDRAM
i740
Graphics
Controller
Display Cache
SDRAM
Controller
RGB
Monitor
Hub Link
I/F
Pentium III-based system only.
Figure 6-1. Graphics Subsystem Block diagram
The Intel graphics controller (Figure 6-2) integrated into the GMCH component includes 2D and
3D accelerator engines working with a deeply-pipelined pre-processor. The controller supports
perspective-correct texture mapping, bilinear and anisotropic Mip-mapping, Alpha blending,
Gouraud shading, and fogging.
The controller uses the AGP 2X interface and supports Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 sideband
cycles for a peak transfer rate of 533 MB/s. The AGP interface also allows the Intel graphics
controller to use a portion of system memory for instructions, textures, and frame (display)
buffering. Either a 32- or 64-MB block of system memory may be configured for use by the
graphics controller for graphics use. Another 512-KB block (fixed) is used for memory-mapped
control and status registers.
In Pentium III-based systems the controller also uses four megabytes of SDRAM (soldered
down) as a display cache especially suited for 3D operation. This additional display cache allows
the graphics controller to simultaneously render graphics to the Z-buffer (in the display cache)
while processing textures in a portion of system memory. The 4-MB SDRAM Display Cache is
accessed through a 32-bit 100-MHz interface.
6-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
82810e/DC-100 GMCH
i740-Equiv. Graphics Controller
4 MB SDRAM
Display Cache
DC I/F
2D
3D
Engine
Engine
HSync
HSync
Monitor
Connector
RAM
DAC
FSB I/F &
Pipelined
Preprocessor
AGP
SDRAM
I/F
RGB
Cntlr.
Pentium III-based system only.
Figure 6-2. 82810e/DC-100 Integrated Graphics Controller
The Intel graphics controller includes special enhancements for 2D operations. Motion
compensation logic is included to improve performance during software decoding of MPEG2
video. Hardware cursor and overlay engines relieve software processing and provide independent
gamma correction, saturation, and brightness control.
The 230-MHz RAMDAC can support a variable-scan rate monitor up to a maximum resolution
of 1600 x 1200 with 256 colors. Video BIOS for the controller is held in the system BIOS ROM
and copied into systems memory at runtime for maximum performance.
6.2.1 FEATURE SUMMARY
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Accelerated driver support for Windows 3.1/95/98/2000, Windows NT 4.0, OS/2
MS ActiveMovie and Media Player support for Win95
Direct 3D support
MS Direct Draw 5/6 support
AGP 2X interface
DDC2B compliant
Accelerator engine support for:
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-ROP BitBLT
Line Draw
Color expansion
Video color conversion/scaling
Motion video
Triangle setup
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 6-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Graphics Subsystem
6.3
DISPLAY MODES
The Intel graphics controller supports the following 2D display modes:
Table 6-1.
Intel 2D Graphics Display Modes
Resolution
640 x 480
640 x 480
640 x 480
720 x 480
720 x 480
720 x 480
720 x 576
720 x 576
720 x 576
800 x 600
800 x 600
800 x 600
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1152 x 864
1152 x 864
1152 x 864
1280 x 720
1280 x 720
1280 x 720
1280 x 960
1280 x 960
1280 x 960
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1280 x 1024
1600 x 900
1600 x 900
1600 x 1200
Bits per pixel
Color Depth
256
Refresh Rate
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
75, 85
8
16
24
8
16
24
8
16
24
8
16
24
8
16
24
8
16
24
8
16
24
8
16
24
8
65K
16.7M
256
65K
16.7M
256
65K
16.7M
256
65K
16.7M
256
65K
16.7M
256
65K
16.7M
256
65K
16.7M
256
65K
16.7M
256
75, 85
75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
60, 70, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 75, 85
60, 70, 72, 75, 85
16
24
8
16
8
65K
16.7M
256
65K
256
6.4
UPGRADING
The graphics controller is not upgradable.
6-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
6.5
PROGRAMMING
6.5.1 CONFIGURATION
The graphics subsystem works off the AGP bus and is configured through PCI configuration
space registers using PCI protocol. These registers (Table 6-3) are configured by BIOS during
POST.
Table 6-3.
PCI Configuration Space Registers
PCI Config.
Address
00h
04h
08h
PCI Config.
Address
14h
30h
3Ch
Function
Vender ID/Device ID
PCI Command
Function
Relocateable I/O Base Address
Expansion ROM Base Address
Interrupt Line / Interrupt Pin
--
Status
10h
Display Memory Base Address
--
For a discussion of accessing PCI configuration space registers refer to chapter 4. For a detailed
description of registers refer to applicable ATI Technologies, Inc. documentation.
6.5.2 CONTROL
6.5.2.1 Standard VGA Modes
Table 6-4 list the control registers used for operating in standard VGA mode. No special drivers
are required for VGA, EGA, and CGA modes. For a detailed description of the registers refer to
applicable ATI Technologies, Inc. documentation.
Table 6-4.
Standard VGA Mode I/O Mapping
I/O
I/O
Address
3B5.00..26h*
3BAh
3C1.00..14h*
3C2h
Function
Address
3C6h..3C9h
3CAh
3CCh
3CF.00..08h
Function
RAMDAC
Read VSYNC Status
Misc. Control, Read
Graphics Controller
CRT Controller (mono)
VSYNC Control, Display Status
Attribute Controller
Misc. Control / Status
Sequencer
3C5h.00..04h*
--
3D5.00..26h* CRT Controller (color)
3DAh VSYNC Control, Display Status (color)
--
* Index at base minus 1 (i.e., if base is 3B5h, index is at 3B4h.
6.5.2.2 Extended VGA Modes
Extended modes use the video BIOS (contained in the system flash ROM) and the supplied
driver.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 6-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Graphics Subsystem
6.6
MONITOR POWER MANAGEMENT CONTROL
This controller provides monitor power control for monitors that conform to the VESA display
power management signaling (DPMS) protocol. This protocol defines different power
consumption conditions and uses the HSYNC and VSYNC signals to select a monitor’s power
condition. Table 6-5 lists the monitor power conditions.
Table 6-5.
Monitor Power Management Conditions
HSYNC
VSYNC
Power Mode
Description
Active
Active
On
Monitor is completely powered up. If activated, the inactivity
counter counts down during system inactivity and if allowed to
tiemout, generates an SMI to initiate the Suspend mode.
Monitor’s high voltage section is turned off and CRT heater
(filament) voltage is reduced from 6.6 to 4.4 VDC. The Off mode
inactivity timer counts down from the preset value and if allowed to
timeout, another SMI is generated and serviced, resulting in the
monitor being placed into the Off mode. Wake up from Suspend
mode is typically a few seconds.
Active
Inactive
Inactive
Suspend
Inactive
Off
Monitor’s high voltage section and heater circuitry is turned off.
Wake up from Off mode is a little longer than from Suspend.
6.7
MONITOR CONNECTOR
The Deskpro EN SFF models provide a DB-15 connector on the rear chassis panel for connection
to an analog monitor. The pinout for this connector is shown in Figure 6-3 and Table 6-6.
9
Figure 6-3. VGA Monitor Connector, (Female DB-15, as viewed from rear).
Table 6-6.
DB-15 Monitor Connector Pinout
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal
R
G
B
NC
GND
R GND
G GND
B GND
Description
Red Analog
Blue Analog
Green Analog
Not Connected
Ground
Red Analog Ground
Blue Analog Ground
Green Analog Ground
Pin
9
Signal
PWR
GND
NC
SDA
HSync
VSync
SCL
Description
+5 VDC (fused) [1]
Ground
Not Connected
DDC2-B Data
Horizontal Sync
Vertical Sync
DDC2-B Clock
--
10
11
12
13
14
15
--
--
NOTES:
[1] Fuse automatically resets when excessive load is removed.
6-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 7
POWER and SIGNAL
DISTRIBUTION
7.1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the power supply and method of general power and signal distribution.
Topics covered in this chapter include:
♦
♦
♦
Power supply assembly/control (7.2) page 7-1
Power distribution (7.3)
Signal distribution (7.4)
page 7-5
page 7-7
7.2
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY/CONTROL
This system features a power supply assembly that is controlled through programmable logic
(Figure 7-1).
Pwr Btn Board
System/Backplane Board
Power On/Off
Logic &
Voltage Regulators
Power On
+3.3
VDC
+5
AUX
Fan
Off
PS
On
110/220 VAC
AC Outlet
+5 VDC
110 VAC
-5 VDC
Power Supply
Assembly
110/220 VAC
Select SW
+12 VDC
Drives
-12 VDC
220 VAC
Figure 7–1. Power Distribution and Control, Block Diagram
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 7-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Power and Signal Distribution
7.2.1 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY
The power supply assembly is contained in a single unit that features a selectable input voltage:
90-132 VAC and 180-264 VAC. The system uses a 90-watt supply with specifications listed in
Table 7-1.
Table 7-1.
90-Watt Power Supply Assembly Specifications (P/N 159447)
Range/
Tolerance
Min. Current
Loading [1]
Max.
Current
Surge
Current [2]
Max.
Ripple
Input Line Voltage:
110 VAC Setting
220 VAC Setting
Line Frequency
Steady State Input (VAC) Current
+3.3 VDC Output
+5 VDC Output
+5 AUX Output
+12 VDC Output
-12 VDC Output
90 - 132 VAC
180-264 VAC
47 - 63 Hz
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3.0 A
6.00 A
10.0 A
2.50 A
1.50 A
0.30 A
--
+/- 5%
+/- 5 %
+/- 4 %
+/- 5 %
0.50 A
0.70 A
0.00 A
0.05 A
0.00 A
6.00 A
12.0 A
2.50 A
3.50 A
0.30 A
50 mV
50 mV
50 mV
120 mV
200 mV
+/- 10 %
NOTES:
[1] Minimum loading requirements must be met at all times to ensure normal operation
and specification compliance.
[2] Surge duration no longer than 10 seconds and +12 tolerance +/- 10%.
The power supply assembly features power line surge protection, withstanding brief surges of up
to 2000 VAC without damage.
7-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
7.2.2 POWER CONTROL
The power supply assembly is controlled digitally by the PS On signal (Figure 7-1). When PS On
is asserted, the Power Supply Assembly is activated and all voltage outputs are produced. When
PS On is de-asserted, the Power Supply Assembly is off and no voltages (except +5 AUX) are
generated. Note that the +5 AUX voltage is always produced as long as the system is
connected to a live AC source.
The PS On signal can be controlled either by the Power Button or by the operating system (OS).
7.2.2.1 Power Button Control
The PS On signal is typically controlled through the Power Button which, when pressed and
released, applies a negative (grounding) pulse to the power control logic. The resultant action of
pressing the power button depends on the state and mode of the system at that time and is
described as follows:
System State
Pressed Power Button Results In:
Off
Negative pulse, of which the falling edge results in power control logic asserting PS
On signal to Power Supply Assembly, which then initializes. ACPI four-second counter
is not active.
On, ACPI Disabled
Negative pulse, of which the falling edge causes power control logic to de-assert the
PS On signal. ACPI four-second counter is not active.
Full On, ACPI Enabled
(Pressed and Released in Under Four Seconds):
Negative pulse, of which the falling edge causes power control logic to
generate SMI-, set a bit in the SMI source register, set a bit for button status,
and start four-second counter. Software should clear the button status bit
within four seconds and the Suspend state is entered. If the status bit is
not cleared by software in four seconds PS On is de-asserted and the
power supply assembly shuts down (this operation is meant as a guard if
the OS is hung).
(Pressed and Held At least Four Seconds Before Release):
PS On is negated, de-activating the power supply.
(Pressed and Released in Under Four Seconds):
System wakes up to Full On.
Suspend, ACPI Enabled
(Pressed and Held At least Four Seconds Before Release):
System powers off.
7.2.2.2 OS Power Control
The PS On signal can be de-asserted by the ACPI-compliant operating system such as Windows
95. This system uses ACPI mode as the default power management mode, allowing the operating
system to shut off the system (once the user has selected that decision) without further user
intervention.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 7-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Power and Signal Distribution
7.3
POWER DISTRIBUTION
7.3.1 3.3/5/12 VDC DISTRIBUTION
The power supply assembly includes a multi-connector cable assembly that routes +3.3 VDC, +5
VDC, -5 VDC, +12 VC, and -12 VDC to the system board as well as to the individual drive
assemblies. Figure 7-2 shows the power supply cabling.
P3
P3
1
2
3
4
Power Supply
Assembly
(SP# 159447)
P1
P1
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
Conn. #
P1
P1 [1]
P3
Pin 1
+3.3
+3.3
+5
Pin 2
+3.3
-12
Pin 3
RTN
RTN
GND
Pin 4
+5
PS On
+12
Pin 5
RTN
RTN
Pin 6
+5
RTN
Pin 7
RTN
RTN
Pin 8
PwrGd
FO
Pin 9
+5 Aux
+5
Pin 10
+12
+5
GND
NOTES:
[1] This row represents pins 11-20 of connector P1.
All + and - values are VDC.
RTN = Return (signal ground)
GND = Power ground
PwrGd = Power Good
FO = Fan off
Figure 7–2. Power Cable Diagram
7.3.2 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Voltages less than 3.3 VDC (including processor core (VccP) voltage) are produced through
regulator circuitry on the system board.
An on-board regulator produces the VccP (processor core) voltage according to the strapping of
signals VID3..0 by the processor. The possible voltages available are listed as follows:
VID 3..0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
VccP
VID 3..0
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
VccP
2.05 VDC
2.00 VDC
1.95 VDC
1.90 VDC
1.85 VDC
1.80 VDC
1.75 VDC
1.70 VDC
1.65 VDC
1.60 VDC
1.55 VDC
1.50 VDC
1.45 VDC
1.40 VDC
1.35 VDC
1.30 VDC
7-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
7.4
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
Figures 7-4 shows general signal distribution between the main subassemblies of the system unit.
PWR Btn
Conn
J8C1
Power Button-
LED Board
(PCA# 010647)
PWR LED
HD LED
Mic Audio In
HP Audio Out
Line Out Audio
Conn
J2D1
Audio-USB I/F
Board
(PCA# 010650)
USB Tx/Rx 3
USB Tx/Rx 4
Conn
J7A1
+3.5, +/- 5,
+/- 12 VDC
Power
Supply
Assembly
Conn
J8B1
System
Board
(PCA # 161014 or
161015)
IDE I/F
5, 12 VDC
Pri. IDE
J7E1
IDE
Hard Drive
IDE I/F,
+5 VDC, Audio
Daughter
Card
(PCA #010644)
Sec. IDE
J8E1
Multibay
Storage Device
Mouse
Conn [1]
Mouse
Kybd
Conn [1]
Keyboard
Speaker
Conn
Audio
NOTE:
[1] On legacy-light models, PS/2-type connector. On legacy-free models, USB connector.
Figure 7–3. Signal Distribution Diagram
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 7-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 Power and Signal Distribution
Audio Header J2D1
Power Button/LED Header J8C1
HD LED + 1
2 Pwr LED +
Mic Audio
1
2 Gnd
4 NC
4 NC
HD LED - 3
Mic Bias 3
Gnd 5
Gnd
5
6 Pwr Btn
Reset 7
HP Audio L 7
8 Gnd
8 Line Audio R
10 HP Audio R
+5 Vcc
9
Line Audio L
9
10 ICH Service
12 Gnd
NC 11
Gnd 13
NC 15
16 NC
+5 Vcc 17
Not implemented
USB Header J7A2
Gnd
1
2 Gnd
4 Port 3 Data -
6 +5 Vcc
Port 3 Data + 3
+5 Vcc 5
Port 4 Data + 7
8 Port 4 Data -
Gnd
9
CD Audio Header P7
1 Ground
2 Audio (left channel)
3 Ground
4 Audio (right channel)
Serial Port A/COM1 Header J1G2
(Legacy-free system board only)
Carrier Detect 1
RX Data 2
6 Data Set Ready
7 Request to Send
8 Clear to Send
9 Ring Indicate
TX Data 3
Data Terminal Ready 4
Ground 5
Figure 7–4. Header Pinouts
7-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Chapter 8
BIOS ROM
8.1
INTRODUCTION
The Compaq iPAQ Internet Device uses Compaq BIOS firmware loaded into the 82802 FWH
component. The BIOS ROM includes such functions as Power-On Self Test (POST), PCI device
initialization, Plug ‘n Play support, power management activities, and Setup. This chapter
includes the following topics:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
Boot/reset functions (8.2)
Memory detection and configuration (8.3)
PnP support (8.5)
Power management functions (8.6)
USB legacy support (8.7)
page 8-2
page 8-11
page 8-12
page 8-15
page 8-17
page 8-18
BIOS upgrading (8.8)
The firmware contained in the BIOS ROM supports the following operating systems and
specifications:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
DOS 6.2
Windows for Workgroups 3.11
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows NT 3.5 and 4.0
OS/2 ver 2.1
OS/2 Warp
SCO Unix
DMI 2.1
Intel Wired for Management (WfM) ver. 2.2
SMBIOS 2.3.1
Alert-On-LAN (AOL)
Wake-On-LAN (WOL)
ACPI/WHIIG and OnNow
APM 1.2
Phoenix PMM
PC98/99 and NetPC
The microprocessor accesses the BIOS ROM as a 128-KB block from E0000h to FFFFFh. The
BIOS data is shadowed in a 64-KB block in the upper memory area. The BIOS segments are
dynamically paged in and out of the 64-KB block as they are needed.
NOTE: This chapter describes BIOS in general and focuses only on aspects of BIOS
unique to this particular system..
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-1
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.2
DESKTOP MANAGEMENT SUPPORT
Desktop Management deals with issues of security, identification, and system management
functions. Desktop Management is provided by BIOS INT 15 functions listed Table 8-1.
Table 8-1.
Desktop Management Functions (INT15)
AX
Function
Mode
E800h
E807h
E813h
E814h
E816h
E817h
E818h
E819h
E81Ah
E81Bh
E81Eh
E820h
E822h
E827h
E828h
E845h
E846h
Get system ID
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real
Get System Information Table
Get monitor information
Get system revision
Get temperature status
Get drive attribute
Get drive off-line test
Get chassis serial number
Write chassis serial number
Get drive threshold
Real
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real
Real
Real
Real
Get drive ID
System Memory Map
Flash ROM/Sys. Admin. Fnc.
DIMM EEPROM Access
Inhibit power button
Access CMOS Feature Bits
Security Functions
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
Real, 16-, & 32-bit Prot.
All 32-bit protected mode calls are accessed by using the industry-standard BIOS32 Service
Directory. Using the service directory involves three steps:
1. Locating the service directory.
2. Using the service directory to obtain the entry point for the client management functions.
3. Calling the client management service to perform the desired function.
The BIOS32 Service Directory is a 16-byte block that begins on a 16-byte boundary between the
physical address range of 0E0000h-0FFFFFh. The format is as follows:
Offset No. Bytes
Description
00h
04h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
4
4
1
1
1
5
Service identifier (four ASCII characters)
Entry point for the BIOS32 Service Directory
Revision level
Length of data structure (no. of 16-byte units)
Checksum (should add up to 00h)
Reserved (all 0s)
8-2 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
To support Windows NT an additional table to the BIOS32 table has been defined to contain 32-
bit pointers for the DDC and SIT locations. The Windows NT extension table is as follows:
; Extension to BIOS SERVICE directory table (next paragraph)
db
db
db
dd
dw
db
dd
dw
db
dd
dw
“32OS”
2
“$DDC”
?
; sig
; number of entries in table
; DDC POST buffer sig
; 32-bit pointer
; byte size
; SIT sig
; 32-bit pointer
; byte size
; ESCD sig
; 32-bit pointer
; bytes size
?
“$SIT”
?
?
“$ERB”
?
?
The service identifier for Desktop Management functions is “$CLM.” Once the service identifier
is found and the checksum verified, a FAR call is invoked using the value specified at offset 04h
to retrieve the CM services entry point. The following entry conditions are used for calling the
Desktop Management service directory:
INPUT:
EAX
= Service Identifier [$CLM]
EBX (31..8)
EBX (7..0)
CS
= Reserved
= Must be set to 00h
= Code selector set to encompass the physical page holding
entry point as well as the immediately following physical page.
It must have the same base. CS is execute/read.
= Data selector set to encompass the physical page holding
entry point as well as the immediately following physical page.
It must have the same base. DS is read only.
= Stack selector must provide at least 1K of stack space and be 32-bit.
DS
SS
(I/O permissions must be provided so that the BIOS can support as necessary)
OUTPUT:
AL
= Return code:
00h, requested service is present
80h, requested service is not present
81h, un-implemented function specified in BL
86h and CF=1, function not supported
EBX
ECX
EDX
= Physical address to use as the selector BASE for the service
= Value to use as the selector LIMIT for the service
= Entry point for the service relative to the BASE returned in EBX
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-3
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.2.1 SYSTEM ID
The INT 15, AX=E800h BIOS function can be used to identify the type of system. This function
will return the system ID in the BX register.
System
ROM Type
PnP ID
System ID
Compaq iPAQ
686J1
CPQB1A0
0630h
8.2.2 SYSTEM INFORMATION TABLE
The System Information Table (SIT) is a comprehensive list of fixed configuration information
arranged into records. The INT 15 AX=E807h BIOS function accesses the SIT by returning a
pointer in ES:BX to indicate the location of the SIT. This system includes the following SIT
records:
Record #
01h
Function
Power conservation
02h
System standby
03h
Display screensave
04h
05h
Hard drive timeout counter
Security features
06h
07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Eh
0Fh
10h
Processor, memory, cache attributes
General peripheral & input device information
Memory module information
Timeout default value
CMOS information
Extended disks information
System information
Product name header
12h
Processor micro-code patch data
The SIT records are used by Compaq applications such as Diagnostics, Inspect, and Insight
Manager. Other applications may use SMBIOS firmware to obtain system data.
8-4 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
8.2.3 EDID RETRIEVE
The BIOS function INT 15, AX=E813h is a tri-modal call that retrieves the VESA extended
display identification data (EDID). Two subfunctions are provided: AX=E813h BH=00h retrieves
the EDID information while AX=E813h BX=01h determines the level of DDC support.
Input:
AX
BH
BH
= E813h
= 00 Get EDID .
= 01 Get DDC support level
If BH = 00 then
DS:(E)SI = Pointer to a buffer (128 bytes) where ROM will return block
If 32-bit protected mode then
DS:(E)SI = Pointer to $DDC location
Output:
(Successful)
If BH = 0:
DS:SI=Buffer with EDID file.
= Number of bytes written
= 0
CX
CF
AH
=00h Completion of command
If BH = 1:
BH
BL
= System DDC support
<0>=1 DDC1 support
<1>=1 DDC2 support
= Monitor DDC support
<0>=1 DDC1 support
<1>=1 DDC2 support
<2>=1 Screen blanked during transfer
(Failure)
CF
= 1
AH
= 86h or 87h
8.2.4 DRIVE FAULT PREDICTION
The Compaq BIOS provides direct Drive Fault Prediction support for IDE-type hard drives. This
feature is provided through two BIOS calls. Function INT 15, AX=E817h is used to retrieve a
512-byte block of drive attribute data while the INT 15, AX=E81Bh is used to retrieve the drive’s
warranty threshold data. If data is returned indicating possible failure then the following
message is displayed:
“1720-Intellisafe Hard Drive detects imminent failure”
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-5
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.2.5 SYSTEM MAP RETRIEVAL
The BIOS function INT 15, AX=E820h will return base memory and ISA/PCI memory
contiguous with base memory as normal memory ranges. This real mode call will indicate
chipset-defined address holes that are not in use, motherboard memory-mapped devices, and all
occurrences of the system BIOS as reserved. Standard PC address ranges will not be reported.
Input:
EBX
ECX
EDX
= continuation value or 00000000h to start at beginning of map
= number of bytes to copy (>=20)
= 534D4150h ('SMAP')
ES:DI = buffer for result (see below)
Offset Size Description
00h QWORD base address
08h QWORD length in bytes
10h DWORD type of address range
01h memory, available to OS
02h reserved, not available (e.g. system ROM, memory-mapped device)
other: not defined
Output:
If CF=0 (success)
EAX
EBX
ECX
= 534D4150h ('SMAP')
= next offset from which to copy or 00000000h if finished
= actual length returned in bytes
ES:DI buffer filled
If CF=1 (failure)
AH = Error Code (86h)
In order to determine the entire memory map, multiple calls must be made.
For example, the first call would be:
Input:
EDX = 534D4150h
EBX = 00h
ECX = 14h
ES:DI = some buffer to store information.
Output:
EAX = 534D4150h
EBX = 01h
ECX = 14h
ES:DI = 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FC 09 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00
(indicates 0-639k is available to the OS)
Consecutive calls would continue until EBX returns with 0, indicating that the memory map is
complete.
8-6 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
8.2.6 FLASH ROM FUNCTIONS
The system BIOS may be upgraded by flashing the ROM using the INT 15, AX=E822h BIOS
interface, which includes the necessary subfunctions. An upgrade utility is provided on a
ROMPAQ diskette.
8.2.7 POWER BUTTON FUNCTIONS
The BIOS includes an interface for controlling the system unit’s power button. The power button
can be disabled and enabled.
The INT 15, AX=E822h, BL=08h function can be invoked to disable the power button,
preventing a user from inadvertently powering down the system. This tri-modal function is
typically used in the ROM flashing procedure to reduce the chance of an accidental power down
while the BIOS is being upgraded.
Entry:
AX
BL
= E822h
= 08h
Return:
(Successful)
CF
= 0
AH
= 00
(Failure)
CF
= 1
AH
= 86, not supported
NOTE: With the Disable function invoked the system can still be powered down by
holding the power button in for four seconds or more.
The INT 15, AX=E822h, BL=09h function is used to restore the power button to the state it was
in prior to invoking the Disable (BL=08h) function.
Entry:
AX
BL
= E822h
= 09h
Return:
(Successful)
CF
= 0
AH
= 00
(Failure)
CF
= 1
AH
= 86, call not supported
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-7
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.2.8 ACCESSING CMOS
Configuration memory data can be retrieved with the BIOS call INT 15, AX=E823h. This tri-
modal function retrieves a specific byte from the CMOS map described in Chapter 4. The
function is described as follows:
INPUT:
EAX
BH
= E823h
= 0, Read
= 1, Write
BL
CX
= Value to write (if a write is specified)
= Bytes number (zero-based)
OUTPUT:
(Successful)
CF
= 0
AH
= 00h
AL
= Byte value (on a read)
(Failure)
CF
= 1
AH
= 86h, Function not supported
= FFh, byte does not exist
8.2.9 ACCESSING CMOS FEATURE BITS
The BIOS function INT 15, AX=E845h is a tri-modal call for accessing areas in non-volatile
memory (CMOS) used for storing variables for various features. Note that this function differs
from the previously discussed call since data blocks of varying lengths are retrieved.
INPUT:
EAX
BL
= E845h
= 0, Read
= 1, Write
BH
CX
= Value Read/to Write
= Feature Bits Number (refer to Table 8-2)
DS:SI = Pointer to buffer passing multiple byte features
OUTPUT:
(Successful)
CF
= 0
EAX
= Reserved
BH
= Value read (on a read)
(Failure)
CF
= 1
AH
= 86h, Function not supported
8-8 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table 8-2.
CMOS Feature Bits
Default
Default
Setting
Yes
Ign.
COM
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IRQ15
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
Terse
Yes
[1]
[1]
[1]
Default
Value
[1]
00h
[1]
Default
Setting
[1]
Norm
[1]
CX
Function
Value
01h
03h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
01h
01h
03h
00h
00h
00h
00h
01h
00h
[1]
CX
Function
0000h
0001h
0002h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0006h
0007h
0008h
0009h
000Ah
000Bh
000Ch
000Dh
000Eh
000Fh
0010h
0011h
0012h
0013h
0014h
0015h
0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh
001Ch
001Dh
001Eh
001Fh
0020h
0021h
0022h
0023h
0024h
PCI 2.1 Mode Enable
Erase Eaze Kybd
COM/IR Port Select
PnP Rejects SET
0025h Asset Tag
0026h Bck-to-bck I/O Delay
0027h CMOS 10-2Fh BU
0028h QuickLock after Stby
0029h Audio Chip Enable
002Ah Audio IRQ
00h
01h
01h
02h
00h
03h
3Fh
00h
1Fh
00h
0Fh
00h
[1]
No
Yes
PCI VGA Snoop
PCI Bus Mastering
Auto Prompt Setup
Mode 2 Config. Enable
Sec. IDE Cntlr, En.
Sec. IDE Cntlr. IRQ
Custom Drive Type 1
Custom Drive Type 2
Custom Drive Type 3
Custom Drive Type 4
POST Verbose/Terse
Translate SCSI Drive
Mfg. Process no.
Admin. Password
Pwr-On Password
Ownership Tag
Warm Boot Pswrd En.
Hood Lock Enable
Hood Removal En.
USB Security Enable
Power Supply Mode
QuickBoot Mode
Onbd NIC Enable
Onbd. SCSI Enable
Onbd. Pri. IDE Enable
Ultra SCSI Md. Enable
QuickLock Enable
QuickBlank Enable
Serial I/F 1 Security [2]
Serial I/F 2 Security
Printer I/F Security [2]
CD/Diskette Boot
IRQ5
DMA1
22xh
DMA3
3F8h
Rsrvd
2F8h
Rsrvd
Yes
No
[1]
[1]
Yes
002Bh Audio DMA
002Ch Audio Addr.
002Dh ECP DMA Config.
002Eh COM1 Base Addr.
002Fh COM1 IRQ
0030h COM2 Base Addr.
0031h COM2 IRQ
0032h UDMA33 Enable
0033h Net Server Md En.
0034h CIA BOM No. Bytes
0035h Copy Std. CMOS
0036h AGP Adapter Srch.
0037h APM Fan Throttle
0038h Mfg. Diags. Enable
0039h RIPL ROM Boot En.
003Ah Exit CleanBoot Scrn.
003Bh Ethernet Speed Sel.
003Ch Ethernet Mode Sel.
003Dh Ethernet Conn. Type
003Eh ACPI Enable
003Fh S/W BOM S/N
0040h ECP Mode Selected
0041h NT Shutdown Dvr.
0042h Em. SCSI Priority
0043h Factor Boot Sel.
0044h Product Name
0045h UUID
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
01h
00h
00h
01h
[1]
00h
00h
01h
01h
Auto
No
Yes
[1]
00h
00h
00h
01h
01h
1Fh
01h
01h
01h
00h
00h
00h
01h
01h
01h
00h
00h
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
ACPI
Fast
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
[1]
Auto
Auto
UTP
Yes
01h
00h
00h
00h
00h
00h
01h
00h
01h
--
Yes
No
Lowest
[1]
[1]
Yes
Off
Yes
--
0046h Processor # Enable
0047h After G3 State
0048h UUID Enable
CD/Diskette Write
--
--
NOTE:
[] Not applicable to these systems.
[1] Default Value will be pointer to buffer DS:SI (16-bit mode) or DS:(E)SI (32-bit mode) where
actual data is held. Default Setting will be unique for each system.
[2] Legacy-light system only.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-9
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.2.10 SECURITY FUNCTIONS
The INT 15 AX=E846h BIOS function is used to control various security features of the system.
This function may be issued by a remote system (over a network). The issuing driver must build a
request buffer for each security feature prior to making the call. This system supports the
following security features:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
QuickLock
IDE controller disable
Serial port disable (legacy-light only)
Parallel port disable (legacy-light only)
Change administrator password
QuickLock on suspend
Ownership tag
USB disable (legacy-light only)
The write-protect function that determines diskette write control is extended to cover all drives
that use removable read/write media (i.e., if diskette write protect is invoked, then any diskette
drive, power drive (SCSI and/or ATAPI), and floptical drive installed will be inaccessible for
(protected from) writes). Client management software should check the following bytes of SIT
record 07h for the location and access method for this bit:
System Information Table, Peripheral and Input Device Record (07h) (partial listing)
Byte
1Fh
20h
Bit
7-0
Function
Removable Read/Write Media Write Protect Enable Byte Offset (0-255)
Removable Read/Write Media Write Protect Enable Bit Location:
7..4
3..0
CMOS Type:
0000 = CMOS
0001 = High CMOS
0010 = NVRAM
0011 = Flat model NVRAM
Bit Location:
0000 = Bit 0
0001 = Bit 1
0010 = Bit 2
0011 = Bit 3
0100 = Bit 4
0101 = Bit 5
0110 = Bit 6
0111 = Bit 7
8-10 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
8.3
MEMORY DETECTION AND CONFIGURATION
This system uses the Serial Presence Detect (SPD) method of determining the installed DIMM
configuration. The BIOS communicates with an EEPROM on each DIMM through an I2C-type
bus to obtain data on the following DIMM parameters:
♦
♦
♦
♦
Presence
Size
Type
Timing/CAS latency
NOTE: Refer to Chapter 3, “Processor/Memory Subsystem” for the SPD format and DIMM
data specific to this system.
The BIOS performs memory detection and configuration with the following steps:
1. Set Memory Buffer Strength – The memory controller must be configured for correct buffer
drive strength. The BIOS provides this function by reading the number of module banks,
ECC enable/disable status, and SDRAM width data from the DIMMs and transferring that
data to the memory controller. SPD bytes checked: 5, 11, 13
2. Determine DIMM Presence/Type – The BIOS checks each memory socket for DIMM
presence. If present, the DIMM type and CAS latency is determined. SPD bytes checked: 2,
9, 10, 18, 23, 24.
Check Sequence:
a. SPD byte 2 is read for all slots first. A failed read or returned value of other than 02h
(EDO) or 04h (SDRAM) results in the slot marked as empty. If mixed types are detected
then only SDRAMs are used (see chapter 3 for details).
b. SPD byte 18 is read for maximum CAS latency, followed by reads of bytes 9 and 10 for
bus speed compatibility. A DIMM detected as too-slow results in an error.
c. If the DIMM can handle the memory bus speed at maximum CAS latency then bytes 23
and 24 are checked to see if the DIMM can work maximum CAS latency minus 1. Once
all slots are checked, the greatest CAS latency (2 or 3) is used. A DIMM detected as
incompatible will result in a bit in CMOS being set and the Num Lock LED on the
keyboard will blink for a short time. Depending on the progress of the BIOS routine a
POST message may be displayed before the system locks up.
3. Initialize SDRAM – If SDRAM are installed then each row containing SDRAM will be
initialized. This step includes pre-charging all banks, sending a CAS-before-RAS command,
sending a Mode-Register-Set-Enable command, reading DIMM location/CAS latency data,
and sending a Normal Op command.
4. Memory Sizing – The SPD bytes 3, 4, and 17 are checked for number of row and column
addresses and (for SDRAM) the number of internal banks.
5. Memory Timing – For SDRAM, the memory controller requires the RAS pre-charge time
and the RAS-to-CAS delay time. SPD bytes checked: 27and 29.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-11
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.4
PNP SUPPORT
The BIOS includes Plug ’n Play (PnP) support for PnP version 1.0A.
NOTE: For full PnP functionality to be realized, all peripherals used in the system must
be designed as “PnP ready.” Any installed ISA peripherals that are not “PnP ready” can
still be used in the system, although configuration parameters may need to be considered
(and require intervention) by the user.
Table 8-2 shows the PnP functions supported (for detailed PnP information refer to the Compaq
BIOS Technical Reference Guide):
Table 8-2.
PnP BIOS Functions
Function Register
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
40h
50h
51h
Get number of system device nodes
Get system device node
Set system device node
Get event
Send message
Get ISA configuration [1]
Get SMBIOS Structure Information
Get Specific SMBIOS Structure
NOTE:
[1] Since no ISA slots are present, this function will return 0 for the max. CSN.
The BIOS call INT 15, AX=E841h, BH=01h can be used by an application to retrieve the default
settings of PnP devices for the user. The application should use the following steps for the display
function:
1. Call PnP function 01(get System Device Node) for each devnode with bit 1 of the control
flag set (get static configuration) and save the results.
2. Call INT 15, AX=E841h, BH=01h.
3. Call PnP “Get Static Configuration” for each devnode and display the defaults.
4. If the user chooses to save the configuration, no further action is required. The system board
devices will be configured at the next boot. If the user wants to abandon the changes, then
the application must call PnP function 02 (Set System Device Node) for each devnode (with
bit 1 of the control flag set for static configuration) with the results from the calls made prior
to invoking this function.
8-12 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
8.4.1 SMBIOS
This system supports System Management BIOS (SMBIOS) version 2.3.1, which is compliant
with the Desktop Management Interface (DMI) specification. The PnP functions 50h and 51h
are used to retrieve the SMBIOS data, which is stored using management information format
(MIF) structures. Function 50h retrieves the number of structures, size of the largest structure,
and SMBIOS version. Function 51h retrieves a specific structure. This system the following
structure types:
Type
0
Data
BIOS Information
1
System Information
3
4
System Enclosure or Chassis
Processor Information
5
6
7
Memory Controller Information
Memory Module Information
Cache Information
8
9
Port Connector Information
System Slots
10
12
13
16
17
18
19
20
On Board Device Information
System Configuration Options
BIOS Language Information
Physical Memory Array
Memory Devices
Memory Error Information
Memory Array Mapped Addresses
Memory Device Mapped Addresses
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-13
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.5
POWER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS
The BIOS provides three types of power management support: independent PM support; ACPI
support, and APM support. These power management interfaces share a common goal of
reducing energy consumption during periods of system inactivity. The following table compares
and describes the different system states identified by the various power management interfaces.
Global
State
G0
Sleep
State
--
Power
Consumption
Maximum
OS Restart
Required
No
System Condition
Fully on. OS and application software is
running, all devices are active, responsive,
and maintaining context.
G1
S1
On, with CPU executing and data held in
memory, but peripheral devices (display
output, some I/O) may be disabled/low power.
Low
No
S2/S3
S4
On, but CPU not executing and cache context Low
lost. Memory is maintained. Display and I/O
devices disabled or under low power.
Off. CPU and most other devices powered off. Low
No data held in RAM, but memory image from
lower state has been saved to disk for recall
upon wake up.
No
Yes
G2
G3
S5
--
Soft Off. OS has completed shutdown. Some
devices may be powered to allow for “wake
up” to occur resulting in a full boot sequence.
Mechanical off. Power to unit has been
switched off (or unit has been unplugged).
Only internal RTC battery power is being
consumed. Unit may be
Minimum
Yes
Yes
None
disassembled/serviced safely.
8.5.1 INDEPENDENT PM SUPPORT
The BIOS ROM can provide power management of the system independently from any software
(OS or application) that is running on the system. In this mode the BIOS uses a timer to
determine when to switch the system to a different power state. State switching is not reported to
the OS and occurs as follows:
On – The computer is running normally and is drawing full power.
Standby – The computer is in a low power state. In this state the processor and chipset are still
running and the VSYNC signal to the monitor is turned off. Returning to the On state requires
very little time and will be initiated by any of the following actions:
a. key stroke
b. mouse movement
Off – The computer is not running and drawing practically no power at all.
8-14 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
8.5.2 ACPI SUPPORT
This system meets the hardware and firmware requirements for being ACPI compliant. The
BIOS function INT 15 AX=E845h can be used to check or set the ACPI enable/disable status of
the system, which defaults to the “ACPI enabled” state. The setup option for ACPI should be
disabled if APM/PnP is to be used with Windows 98 or when disabling power management and
PnP support for NT5.0. A hardware redetection should be made with Windows 98 and a reinstall
of Windows NT5.0 should be performed when an ACPI switch is made. This system supports
the following ACPI functions:
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
PM timer
Power button
Power button override
RTC alarm
Sleep/Wake logic (S1, S4 (NT), S5
Legacy/ACPI select
C1 state (Halt)
C2 state (STOPGRANT)
C3 state (no clock)
PCI PME
8.5.3 APM 1.2 SUPPORT
Advanced Power Management (APM) BIOS support provides interaction between the BIOS
ROM and the operating system (OS). The BIOS advises the OS when a power state transition
should occur. The OS then notifies the appropriate driver(s) and reports back to the BIOS.
For maximum energy-conservation benefit, APM functionality should be implemented using the
following three layers:
♦
♦
♦
BIOS layer (APM BIOS (ver. 1.2, 1.1, 1.0))
Operating system (OS) layer (APM driver)
Application layer (APM-aware application or device driver)
The process starts with the OS or driver making a connection with the BIOS through an APM
BIOS call. In a DOS environment POWER.EXE makes a Real mode connection. In Windows 3.1
and in Windows 95, a 32-bit connection is made. Currently Windows NT does not make an APM
connection. With power management enabled, inactivity timers are monitored.
When an inactivity timer times out, an SMI is sent to the microprocessor to invoke the SMI
handler. The SMI handler works with the APM driver and APM BIOS to take appropriate action
based on which inactivity timer timed out.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-15
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
Three power states are defined under power management:
On - The computer is running, all subsystems are on and drawing full power. Any activity in the
following subsystems will reset the activity timer, which has a default setting of 15 minutes
before Standby entered:
a. Keyboard (PS/2 only)
b. Mouse (PS/2 only)
c. Serial port
d. Hard drive
Standby - The computer is in a low power state: video is off, some subsystems may be drawing
less power, and the microprocessor is halted except for servicing interrupts. Video graphics
controller is under driver control and/or VSYNC is off and the power supply fan is turned off.
Any of the following activities will generate a wake-up SMI and return the system to On:
a. Keyboard (PS/2 only)
b. Mouse (PS/2 only)
c. Serial port
d. Hard drive
e. RTC Alarm
f. Power Button
If no APM connection is present, the BIOS will set an APM timer to 45 minutes, at which time
the Suspend will be entered if no activity has occurred. This function can be defeated (so that
Suspend will not be achieved). If an APM connection is present, the BIOS APM timer is not used
and Suspend is entered only by user request either through an icon in Windows 95 or by pressing
and releasing the power button under 4 seconds.
Suspend - The computer is in a low power state: video graphics controller is under driver control
and/or HSYNC and VSYNC are off, some subsystems may be drawing less power, and the
microprocessor is halted except for servicing interrupts. Any of the following activities will
generate a wake-up SMI and return the system to On:
a. Keyboard (PS/2 only)
b. Mouse (PS/2 only)
c. Serial port
d. Diskette drive
e. Hard drive
f. RTC Alarm
g. Network interface controller
8-16 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
The APM BIOS for this system supports APM 1.2 as well as previous versions 1.1 and 1.0. The
APM BIOS functions are listed in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3.
APM BIOS Functions (INT15)
AX
Function
5300h
5301h
5302h
5303h
5304h
5305h
5306h
5307h
5308h
5309h
530Ah
530Bh
530Ch
530Dh
530Eh
530Fh
5380h
APM Installation Check
APM Connect (Real Mode)
APM Connect (16-bit Protected Mode)
APM Connect (32-bit Protected Mode)
Interface Disconnect
CPU Idle
CPU Busy
Set Power State [1]
Enable/Disable Power Management
Restore Power On Defaults
Get Power Status
Get PM Event
Get Power State
Enable/Disable Device Power Management
APM Driver Version
Engage/Disengage Power Management
OEM (Compaq) Specific APM Function
8.6
USB LEGACY SUPPORT
The BIOS ROM checks the USB port, during POST, for the presence of a USB keyboard. This
allows a system with only a USB keyboard to be used during ROM-based setup and also on a
system with an OS that does not include a USB driver.
On such a system a keystroke will generate an SMI and the SMI handler will retrieve the data
from the device and convert it to PS/2 data. The data will be passed to the keyboard controller
and processed as in the PS/2 interface. Changing the delay and/or typematic rate of a USB
keyboard though BIOS function INT 16 is not supported.
The system does not support hot-plugging of a USB keyboard, nor is a keyboard attached to a
USB hub supported. A PS/2 keyboard and a USB keyboard can, however, be connected and used
simultaneously.
Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices 8-17
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 BIOS ROM
8.7
BIOS UPGRADING
The flash ROM device can be re-written with updated BIOS code if necessary. The flashing
procedure is as follows:
FORMAT A: /S
1. Create a system (bootable) diskette using the
command in DOS.
2. Download the appropriate BIOS firmware from the Compaq web site.
3. Copy the downloaded BIOS file and the flash utility file onto the boot diskette.
4. Unzip the BIOS and flash utility files, which should result in an .exe file and a .bin file.
5. Place the boot diskette into drive A: and reboot the system.
.exe
.bin”
filename
6. At the A: prompt, type in “filename
names) and press Enter.
(there is a space between the file
7. At the Flash Memory Write menu, to the question “Do you want to save BIOS?” select Y. If
you want to save the current BIOS then type the current BIOS name and the extension after
“File name to save” (example: type in 613j900.bin). Alternately, select N if you do not want
to save the current BIOS.
8. To the question “Are you sure to program?” select Y.
9. Wait until the message “Power Off or Reset the system,” indicating the BIOS has been
loaded successfully. Then remove the boot diskette. Should power be lost or the system
reset during this time (before the message is displayed) the BIOS code in ROM will
likely be corrupted and the procedure will have to be repeated (starting at step 5).
10. Turn off (power down) the system.
11. While holding the End key down, turn on (power up) the system, making sure the End key
is held down until the Setup utility is entered.
12. Complete the Setup utility as appropriate.
13. Re-boot the system.
8-18 Compaq iPAQ Family of Internet Devices
First Edition - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Appendix A
ERROR MESSAGES AND CODES
A.1 INTRODUCTION
This appendix lists the error codes and a brief description of the probable cause of the error. Note
that not all errors listed in this appendix may be applicable to a particular system
depending on the model and/or configuration.
A.2 POWER-ON MESSAGES
Table A-1.
Power-On Messages
Message
Beeps
(None)
2 short
(None)
Probable Cause
Invalid time or date
Power-On successful
Any failure
CMOS Time and Date Not Set
(none)
Run Setup
A.3 BEEP/KEYBOARD LED CODES
Table A-2.
Beep/Keyboard LED Codes
Beeps
LED [1]
Probable Cause
1 short, 2 long
1 long, 2 short
2 long, 1 short
None
None
None
NUM lock blinking
CAP lock blinking
Base memory failure.
Video/graphics controller failure.
System failure (prior to video initialization).
Keyboard locked in network mode.
ROMPAQ diskette not present, bad, or drive not ready.
Password prompt.
Scroll lock blinking
All three blink in sequence
NUM lock steady on
CAP lock steady on
All three blink together
All three steady on
None
None
ROM flash failed.
Successful ROM flash.
NOTE:
[1] PS/2 keyboard only.
Compaq Personal Computers A-1
Changed – January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Error Messages and Codes
A.4 POWER-ON SELF TEST (POST) MESSAGES
Table A-3.
Power-On Self Test (POST) Messages
Error Message
Probable Cause
Bad PnP Serial ID Checksum
Address Lines Short!
Cache Memory Failure, Do Not Enable
Cache!
Serial ID checksum of PnP card was invalid.
Error in address decoding circuitry on system board.
Defective cache memory, CPU has failed.
CMOS Battery Failed
Low RTC/CMOS battery
CMOS Checksum Invalid
CMOS System Options Not Set
CMOS Display Type Mismatch
Previous and current checksum value mismatch.
Corrupt or non-existant CMOS values.
Graphics/video type in CMOS does not match type detected by
BIOS.
CMOS Memory Size Mismatch
CMOS Time and Date Not Set
Diskette Boot Failure
Memory amount detected does not match value stored in CMOS.
Time and date are invalid.
Boot disk in drive A: is corrupt.
DMA Bus Timeout
DMA Controller Error
Bus driven by device for more than 7.8 us
Error in one or both DMA controllers.
Drive Not Ready Error
BIOS cannot access the diskette drive.
BIOS cannot communicate with diskette drive controller.
Diskette drive controller has requested a resource already in use.
Diskette Drive Controller Failure
Diskette Drive Controller Resource
Conflict
Diskette Drive A: Failure
BIOS cannot access drive A:.
Diskette Drive B: Failure
BIOS cannot access drive B:
Gate A20 Failure
Invalid Boot Diskette
Gate A20 of keyboard controller not working.
BIOS can read but cannot boot system from drive A:.
Keyboard controller failure.
Locked keyboard.
Key pressed down.
Error exists in master DMA controller.
Master interrupt controller failure.
Amount of memory detected is less than stated value in CMOS.
ESCD data was re-initialized due to NVRAM checksum error.
Keyboard Controller Error
Keyboard is Locked…Please Unlock It
Keyboard Stuck Key Detected
Master DMA Controller Error
Master Interrupt Controller Error
Memory Size Decreased
NVRAM Checksum Error, NVRAM
Cleared
NVRAM Cleared By Jumper
NVRAM Data Invalid, NVRAM Cleared
Off Board Parity Error Addr. (HEX) = X
Parallel Port Resource Conflict
PCI Error Log is Full
NVRAM has been cleared by removal of jumper.
Invalid entry in ESCD.
Parity error occurred in expansion memory, x= address of error.
Parallel port has requested a resource already in use.
PCI conflict error limit (15) has been reached.
Two devices requested the same resource.
PCI I/O Port Conflict
PCI Memory Conflict
Two devices requested the same resource.
Primary Boot Device Not Found
Primary IDE Cntrl. Resource Conflict
Primary Input Device Not Found
Secondary IDE Controller Resource
Serial Port 1 Resource Conflict
Serial Port 2 Resource Conflict
Slave DMA Controller Error
Slave Interrupt Controller Error
Static Device Resource Conflict
System Board Device Resource
Conflict
Designated primary boot device could not be found.
Primary IDE controller requested a resource already in use.
Designated primary input device could not be found.
Secondary IDE controller has requested a resource already in use.
Serial port 1 requested a resource already in use.
Serial port 2 requested a resource already in use.
Error exists in slave DMA controller.
Slave interrupt controller failure.
A non-PnP ISA card has requested a resource already in use.
A non-PnP ISA card has requested a resource already in use.
System Memory Size Mismatch
Amount of memory detected on system board is different from
amount indicated in CMOS.
NOTE:
PCI and PnP messages are displayed with bus, device, and function information.
A-2 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
A.5 PROCESSOR ERROR MESSAGES (1xx-xx)
Table A-4.
System Error Messages
Message
101
102
Probable Cause
Option ROM error
Message
110-01
110-02
110-03
111-01
112-01
112-02
112-03
112-04
112-05
112-06
112-07
112-08
112-09
112-10
112-11
112-12
113-01
114-01
116-xx
162-xx
163-xx
164-xx
199-00
Probable Cause
Programmable timer load data test failed
Programmable timer dynamic test failed
Program timer 2 load data test failed
Refresh detect test failed
Speed test Slow mode out of range
Speed test Mixed mode out of range
Speed test Fast mode out of range
Speed test unable to enter Slow mode
Speed test unable to enter Mixed mode
Speed test unable to enter Fast mode
Speed test system error
Unable to enter Auto mode in speed test
Unable to enter High mode in speed test
Speed test High mode out of range
Speed test Auto mode out of range
Speed test variable speed mode inop.
Protected mode test failed
System board failure
System board failure
Master int. cntlr. test fialed
Slave int. cntlr. test failed
Int. cntlr. SW RTC inoperative
Port 61 bit <6> not at zero
Port 61 bit <5> not at zero
Port 61 bit <3> not at zero
Port 61 bit <1> not at zero
Port 61 bit <0> not at zero
Port 61 bit <5> not at one
(see note)
103
104-01
104-02
104-03
105-01
105-02
105-03
105-04
105-05
105-06
105-07
105-08
105-09
105-10
105-11
105-12
105-13
105-14
106-01
107-01
108-02
108-03
109-01
109-02
109-03
Port 61 bit <3> not at one
Port 61 bit <1> not at one
Port 61 bit <0> not at one
Port 61 I/O test failed
Port 61 bit <7> not at zero
Port 61 bit <2> not at zero
No int. generated by failsafe timer
NMI not triggered by failsafe timer
Keyboard controller test failed
CMOS RAM test failed
CMOS interrupt test failed
CMOS not properly initialized (int.test)
CMOS clock load data test failed
CMOS clock rollover test failed
CMOS not properly initialized (clk test)
Speaker test failed
Way 0 read/write test failed
Sys. options failed (mismatch in drive type)
Time and date not set
Memory size
Installed devices test failed
NOTE: A 102 message code may be caused by one of a variety of processor-related problems
that may be solved by replacing the processor, although system board replacement may be
needed.
Compaq Personal Computers A-3
Changed – January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Error Messages and Codes
A.6 MEMORY ERROR MESSAGES (2xx-xx)
Table A-5.
Memory Error Messages
Message
200-04
200-05
200-06
200-07
200-08
201-01
202-01
202-02
202-03
203-01
203-02
203-03
204-01
204-02
204-03
204-04
204-05
205-01
205-02
205-03
206-xx
207-xx
210-01
210-02
210-03
211-01
211-02
211-03
213-xx
214-xx
215-xx
Probable Cause
Real memory size changed
Extended memory size changed
Invalid memory configuration
Extended memory size changed
CLIM memory size changed
Memory machine ID test failed
Memory system ROM checksum failed
Failed RAM/ROM map test
Failed RAM/ROM protect test
Memory read/write test failed
Error while saving block in read/write test
Error while restoring block in read/write test
Memory address test failed
Error while saving block in address test
Error while restoring block in address test
A20 address test failed
Page hit address test failed
Walking I/O test failed
Error while saving block in walking I/O test
Error while restoring block in walking I/O test
Increment pattern test failed
ECC failure
Memory increment pattern test
Error while saving memory during increment pattern test
Error while restoring memory during increment pattern test
Memory random pattern test
Error while saving memory during random memory pattern test
Error while restoring memory during random memory pattern test
Incompatible DIMM in slot x
Noise test failed
Random address test
A.7 KEYBOARD ERROR MESSAGES (30x-xx)
Table A-6.
Keyboard Error Messages
Message
300-xx
301-01
301-02
301-03
301-04
301-05
302-xx
302-01
303-01
303-02
303-03
303-04
Probable Cause
Failed ID test
Message
303-05
303-06
303-07
303-08
303-09
304-01
304-02
304-03
304-04
304-05
304-06
--
Probable Cause
LED test, LED command test failed
LED test, LED command test failed
LED test, LED command test failed
LED test, command byte restore test failed
LED test, LEDs failed to light
Keyboard repeat key test failed
Unable to enter mode 3
Incorrect scan code from keyboard
No Make code observed
Cannot /disable repeat key feature
Unable to return to Normal mode
--
Kybd short test, 8042 self-test failed
Kybd short test, interface test failed
Kybd short test, echo test failed
Kybd short test, kybd reset failed
Kybd short test, kybd reset failed
Failed individual key test
Kybd long test failed
LED test, 8042 self-test failed
LED test, reset test failed
LED test, reset failed
LED test, LED command test failed
A-4 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
A.8 PRINTER ERROR MESSAGES (4xx-xx)
Table A-7.
Printer Error Messages
Message
401-01
402-01
402-02
402-03
402-04
402-05
402-06
402-07
402-08
402-09
402-10
Probable Cause
Printer failed or not connected
Printer data register failed
Printer control register failed
Data and control registers failed
Loopback test failed
Loopback test and data reg. failed
Loopback test and cntrl. reg. failed
Loopback tst, data/cntrl. reg. failed
Interrupt test failed
Message
402-11
402-12
402-13
402-14
402-15
402-16
402-01
403-xx
404-xx
498-00
--
Probable Cause
Interrupt test, data/cntrl. reg. failed
Interrupt test and loopback test failed
Int. test, LpBk. test., and data register failed
Int. test, LpBk. test., and cntrl. register failed
Int. test, LpBk. test., and data/cntrl. reg. failed
Unexpected interrupt received
Printer pattern test failed
Printer pattern test failed
Parallel port address conflict
Printer failed or not connected
--
Interrupt test and data reg. failed
Interrupt test and control reg. failed
A.9 VIDEO (GRAPHICS) ERROR MESSAGES (5xx-xx)
Table A-8.
Video (Graphics) Error Messages
Message
501-01
502-01
503-01
504-01
505-01
506-01
507-01
Probable Cause
Message
508-01
509-01
510-01
511-01
512-01
514-01
516-01
Probable Cause
Video controller test failed
Video memory test failed
Video attribute test failed
Video character set test failed
80x25 mode, 9x14 cell test failed
80x25 mode, 8x8 cell test failed
40x25 mode test failed
320x200 mode, color set 0 test failed
320x200 mode, color set 1 test failed
640x200 mode test failed
Screen memory page test failed
Gray scale test failed
White screen test failed
Noise pattern test failed
See Table A-14 for additional graphics messages.
Compaq Personal Computers A-5
Changed – January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Error Messages and Codes
A.10 DISKETTE DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES (6xx-xx)
Table A-9.
Diskette Drive Error Messages
Message
6xx-01
6xx-02
6xx-03
6xx-04
6xx-05
6xx-06
6xx-07
6xx-08
6xx-09
6xx-10
Probable Cause
Message
6xx-20
6xx-21
6xx-22
6xx-23
6xx-24
6xx-25
6xx-26
6xx-27
6xx-28
--
Probable Cause
Exceeded maximum soft error limit
Exceeded maximum hard error limit
Previously exceeded max soft limit
Previously exceeded max hard limit
Failed to reset controller
Fatal error while reading
Fatal error while writing
Failed compare of R/W buffers
Failed to format a tract
Failed sector wrap test
Failed to get drive type
Failed to get change line status
Failed to clear change line status
Failed to set drive type in ID media
Failed to read diskette media
Failed to verify diskette media
Failed to read media in speed test
Failed speed limits
Failed write-protect test
--
600-xx = Diskette drive ID test
601-xx = Diskette drive format
602-xx = Diskette read test
603-xx = Diskette drive R/W compare test
604-xx = Diskette drive random seek test
605-xx = Diskette drive ID media
606-xx = Diskette drive speed test
607-xx = Diskette drive wrap test
608-xx = Diskette drive write-protect test
609-xx = Diskette drive reset controller test
610-xx = Diskette drive change line test
611-xx = Pri. diskette drive port addr. conflict
612-xx = Sec. diskette drive port addr. conflict
694-00 = Pin 34 not cut on 360-KB drive
697-00 = Diskette type error
698-00 = Drive speed not within limits
699-00 = Drive/media ID error (run Setup)
A.11 SERIAL INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (11xx-xx)
Table A-10.
Serial Interface Error Messages
Message
1101-01
1101-02
1101-03
1101-04
1101-05
1101-06
1101-07
1101-08
1101-09
1101-10
1101-11
1101-12
Probable Cause
Message
1101-13
1101-14
1109-01
1109-02
1109-03
1109-04
1109-05
1109-06
1150-xx
1151-xx
1152-xx
1155-xx
Probable Cause
UART DLAB bit failure
Line input or UART fault
Address line fault
UART cntrl. signal interrupt failure
DRVR/RCVR data failure
Clock register initialization failure
Clock register rollover failure
Clock reset failure
Input line or clock failure
Address line fault
Data line fault
Comm port setup error (run Setup)
COM1 address conflict
COM2 address conflict
COM port address conflict
Data line fault
UART cntrl. signal failure
UART THRE bit failure
UART Data RDY bit failure
UART TX/RX buffer failure
Interrupt circuit failure
COM1 set to invalid INT
COM2 set to invalid INT
DRVR/RCVR cntrl. signal failure
A-6 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
A.12 MODEM COMMUNICATIONS ERROR MESSAGES (12xx-xx)
Table A-11.
Serial Interface Error Messages
Message
1201-XX
1201-01
1201-02
1201-03
1201-04
1201-05
1201-06
1201-07
1201-08
1201-09
1201-10
1201-11
1201-12
1201-13
1201-14
1201-15
1201-16
1201-17
1202-XX
1202-01
1202-02
1202-03
1202-11
1202-12
1202-13
1202-21
1202-22
1202-23
1203-XX
1203-01
1203-02
1203-03
1204-XX
1204-01
1204-02
Probable Cause
Modem internal loopback test
UART DLAB bit failure
Line input or UART failure
Address line failure
Data line fault
UART control signal failure
UART THRE bit failure
UART DATA READY bit failure
UART TX/RX buffer failure
Interrupt circuit failure
COM1 set to invalid inturrupt
COM2 set to invalid
DRVR/RCVR control signal failure
UART control signal interrupt failure
DRVR/RCVR data failure
Modem detection failure
Message
1204-03
1204-04
1204-05
1204-06
1204-07
1204-08
1204-09
1204-10
1204-11
1205-XX
1205-01
1205-02
1205-03
1205-04
1205-05
1205-06
1205-07
1205-08
1205-09
1205-10
1205-11
1206-XX
1206-17
1210-XX
1210-01
1210-02
1210-03
1210-04
1210-05
1210-06
1210-07
1210-08
1210-09
1210-10
1210-11
Probable Cause
Data block retry limit reached [4]
RX exceeded carrier lost limit
TX exceeded carrier lost limit
Time-out waiting for dial tone
Dial number string too long
Modem time-out waiting for remote response
Modem exceeded maximum redial limit
Line quality prevented remote response
Modem time-out waiting for remote connection
Modem auto answer test
Time-out waiting for SYNC [5]
Time-out waiting for response [5]
Data block retry limit reached [5]
RX exceeded carrier lost limit
TX exceeded carrier lost limit
Time-out waiting for dial tone
Modem ROM, checksum failure
Tone detect failure
Modem internal test
Dial number string too long
Modem time-out waiting for remote response
Modem exceeded maximum redial limit
Line quality prevented remote response
Modem time-out waiting for remote connection
Dial multi-frequency tone test
Tone detection failure
Modem direct connect test
Time-out waiting for SYNC [6]
Time-out waiting for response [6]
Data block retry limit reached [6]
RX exceeded carrier lost limit
TX exceeded carrier lost limit
Time-out waiting for dial tone
Time-out waiting for SYNC [1]
Time-out waiting for response [1]
Data block retry limit reached [1]
Time-out waiting for SYNC [2]
Time-out waiting for response [2]
Data block retry limit reached [2]
Time-out waiting for SYNC [3]
Time-out waiting for response [3]
Data block retry limit reached [3]
Modem external termination test
Modem external TIP/RING failure
Modem external data TIP/RING fail
Modem line termination failure
Modem auto originate test
Time-out waiting for SYNC [4]
Time-out waiting for response [4]
Dial number string too long
Modem time-out waiting for remote response
Modem exceeded maximum redial limit
Line quality prevented remote response
Modem time-out waiting for remote connection
NOTES:
[1] Local loopback mode
[2] Analog loopback originate mode
[3] Analog loopback answer mode
[4] Modem auto originate test
[5] Modem auto answer test
[6] Modem direct connect test
Compaq Personal Computers A-7
Changed – January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Error Messages and Codes
A.13 SYSTEM STATUS ERROR MESSAGES (16xx-xx)
Table A-12.
System Status Error Messages
Message
1601-xx
1611-xx
Probable Cause
Temperature violation
Fan failure
See Table A-18 for additional messages.
A.14 HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES (17xx-xx)
Table A-13.
Hard Drive Error Messages
Message
17xx-01
17xx-02
17xx-03
17xx-04
17xx-05
17xx-06
17xx-07
17xx-08
17xx-09
17xx-10
17xx-19
17xx-40
17xx-41
17xx-42
17xx-43
17xx-44
17xx-45
17xx-46
17xx-47
17xx-48
17xx-49
17xx-50
Probable Cause
Exceeded max. soft error limit
Exceeded max. Hard error limit
Previously exceeded max. soft error limit 17xx-53
Previously exceeded max.hard error limit 17xx-54
Failed to reset controller
Fatal error while reading
Fatal error while writing
Failed compare of R/W buffers
Failed to format a track
Failed diskette sector wrap during read
Cntlr. failed to deallocate bad sectors
Cylinder 0 error
Message
17xx-51
17xx-52
Probable Cause
Failed I/O read test
Failed file I/O compare test
Failed drive/head register test
Failed digital input register test
Cylinder 1 error
Failed controller RAM diagnostics
Failed controller-to-drive diagnostics
Failed to write sector buffer
Failed to read sector buffer
Failed uncorrectable ECC error
Failed correctable ECC error
Failed soft error rate
Exceeded max. bad sectors per track
Failed to initialize drive parameter
Failed to write long
Failed to read long
Failed to read drive size
Failed translate mode
17xx-55
17xx-56
17xx-57
17xx-58
17xx-59
17xx-60
17xx-62
17xx-63
17xx-65
17xx-66
17xx-67
17xx-68
Drive not ready
Failed to recalibrate drive
Failed to format a bad track
Failed controller diagnostics
Failed to get drive parameters from ROM 17xx-69
Invalid drive parameters from ROM
Failed to park heads
Failed to move hard drive table to RAM
Failed to read media in file write test
Failed I/O write test
17xx-70
17xx-71
17xx-72
17xx-73
--
Failed non-translate mode
Bad track limit exceeded
Previously exceeded bad track limit
--
1700-xx = Hard drive ID test
1701-xx = Hard drive format test
1702-xx = Hard drive read test
1719-xx = Hard drive power mode test
1720-xx = SMART drive detects imminent failure
1721-xx = SCSI hard drive imminent failure
1724-xx = Net work preparation test
1736-xx = Drive monitoring test
1771-xx = Pri. IDE controller address conflict
1772-xx = Sec. IDE controller address conflict
1780-xx = Disk 0 failure
1781-xx = Disk 1 failure
1782-xx = Pri. IDE controller failure
1790-xx = Disk 0 failure
1791-xx = Disk 1 failure
1792-xx = Se. controller failure
1703-xx = Hard drive read/write compare test
1704-xx = Hard drive random seek test
1705-xx = Hard drive controller test
1706-xx = Hard drive ready test
1707-xx = Hard drive recalibrate test
1708-xx = Hard drive format bad track test
1709-xx = Hard drive reset controller test
1710-xx = Hard drive park head test
1714-xx = Hard drive file write test
1715-xx = Hard drive head select test
1716-xx = Hard drive conditional format test
1717-xx = Hard drive ECC test
1793-xx = Sec. Controller or disk failure
1799-xx = Invalid hard drive type
A-8 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
A.15 HARD DRIVE ERROR MESSAGES (19xx-xx)
Table A-14.
Hard Drive Error Messages
Message
19xx-01
19xx-02
19xx-03
19xx-04
19xx-05
19xx-06
19xx-07
19xx-08
19xx-09
19xx-10
19xx-11
19xx-12
19xx-13
19xx-14
19xx-15
19xx-16
19xx-17
19xx-18
19xx-19
19xx-20
Probable Cause
Drive not installed
Cartridge not installed
Tape motion error
Drive busy erro
Message
19xx-21
19xx-22
19xx-23
19xx-24
19xx-25
19xx-26
19xx-27
19xx-28
19xx-30
19xx-31
19xx-32
19xx-33
19xx-34
19xx-35
19xx-36
19xx-37
19xx-38
19xx-39
19xx-40
19xx-91
Probable Cause
Got servo pulses second time but not first
Never got to EOT after servo check
Change line unset
Write-protect error
Unable to erase cartridge
Cannot identify drive
Drive not compatible with controller
Format gap error
Exception bit not set
Unexpected drive status
Device fault
Illegal command
Track seek error
Tape write-protect error
Tape already Servo Written
Unable to Servo Write
Unable to format
Format mode error
Drive recalibration error
Tape not Servo Written
Tape not formatted
Drive time-out error
Sensor error flag
Block locate (block ID) error
Soft error limit exceeded
Hard error limit exceeded
Write (probably ID ) error
NEC fatal error
No data detected
Power-on reset occurred
Failed to set FLEX format mode
Failed to reset FLEX format mode
Data mismatch on directory track
Data mismatch on track 0
Failed self-test
Power lost during test
1900-xx = Tape ID test failed
1904-xx = Tape BOT/EOT test failed
1901-xx = Tape servo write failed
1902-xx = Tape format failed
1903-xx = Tape drive sensor test failed
1905-xx = Tape read test failed
1906-xx = Tape R/W compare test failed
1907-xx = Tape write-protect failed
A.16 VIDEO (GRAPHICS) ERROR MESSAGES (24xx-xx)
Table A-15.
Video (Graphics) Error Messages
Message
2402-01
2403-01
2404-01
2405-01
2406-01
2407-01
2408-01
2409-01
2410-01
2411-01
2412-01
2414-01
2416-01
2417-01
2417-02
2417-03
2417-04
2418-01
Probable Cause
Video memory test failed
Video attribute test failed
Message Probable Cause
2418-02
2419-01
2420-01
2421-01
2422-01
2423-01
2424-01
2425-01
2431-01
2432-01
2448-01
2451-01
2456-01
2458-xx
2468-xx
2477-xx
2478-xx
2480-xx
EGA shadow RAM test failed
EGA ROM checksum test failed
EGA attribute test failed
Video character set test failed
80x25 mode, 9x14 cell test failed
80x25 mode, 8x8 cell test failed
40x25 mode test failed
320x200 mode color set 0 test failed
320x200 mode color set 1 test failed
640x200 mode test failed
Screen memory page test failed
Gray scale test failed
White screen test failed
640x200 mode test failed
640x350 16-color set test failed
640x350 64-color set test failed
EGA Mono. text mode test failed
EGA Mono. graphics mode test failed
640x480 graphics mode test failed
320x200 256-color set test failed
Advanced VGA controller test failed
132-column AVGA test failed
AVGA 256-color test failed
AVGA BitBLT test failed
Noise pattern test failed
Lightpen text test failed, no response
Lightpen text test failed, invalid response
Lightpen graphics test failed, no resp.
Lightpen graphics test failed, invalid resp.
EGA memory test failed
AVGA DAC test failed
AVGA data path test failed
AVGA BitBLT test failed
AVGA linedraw test failed
Compaq Personal Computers A-9
Changed – January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Error Messages and Codes
A.17 AUDIO ERROR MESSAGES (3206-xx)
Table A-16.
Audio Error Message
Message
Probable Cause
3206-xx
Audio subsystem internal error
A.18 DVD/CD-ROM ERROR MESSAGES (33xx-xx)
Table A-17.
DVD/CD-ROM Drive Error Messages
Message
3301-xx
3305-XX
Probable Cause
Drive test failed
Seek test failed
See Table A-18 for additional messages.
A.19 NETWORK INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (60xx-xx)
Table A-18.
Network Interface Error Messages
Message
6000-xx
6014-xx
6016-xx
6028-xx
6029-xx
Probable Cause
Message
6054-xx
6056-xx
6068-xx
6069-xx
6089-xx
Probable Cause
Pointing device interface error
Ethernet configuration test failed
Ethernet reset test failed
Ethernet int. loopback test failed
Ethernet ext. loopback test failed
Token ring configuration test failed
Token ring reset test failed
Token ring int. loopback test failed
Token ring ext. loopback test failed
Token ring open
A-10 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
A.20 SCSI INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (65xx-xx, 66xx-xx, 67xx-xx)
Table A-19.
SCSI Interface Error Messages
Message
6nyy-02
6nyy-03
6nyy-05
6nyy-06
6nyy-07
6nyy-08
6nyy-09
6nyy-10
6nyy-11
6nyy-12
6nyy-13
6nyy-14
6nyy-15
6nyy-16
6nyy-17
6nyy-18
6nyy-21
6nyy-24
6nyy-25
6nyy-30
6nyy-31
6nyy-32
Probable Cause
Drive not installed
Media not installed
Seek failure
Drive timed out
Drive busy
Drive already reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Media soft error
Drive not ready
Media error
Drive hardware error
Illegal drive command
Media was changed
Tape write-protected
No data detected
Drive command aborted
Media hard error
Reserved
Message
6nyy-33
6nyy-34
6nyy-35
6nyy-36
6nyy-39
6nyy-40
6nyy-41
6nyy-42
6nyy-43
6nyy-44
6nyy-50
6nyy-51
6nyy-52
6nyy-53
6nyy-54
6nyy-60
6nyy-61
6nyy-65
6nyy-90
6nyy-91
6nyy-92
6nyy-99
Probable Cause
Illegal controller command
Invalid SCSI bus phase
Invalid SCSI bus phase
Invalid SCSI bus phase
Error status from drive
Drive timed out
SSI bus stayed busy
ACK/REQ lines bad
ACK did not deassert
Parity error
Data pins bad
Data line 7 bad
MSG, C/D, or I/O lines bad
BSY never went busy
BSY stayed busy
Controller CONFIG-1 register fault
Controller CONFIG-2 register fault
Media not unloaded
Fan failure
Controller timed out
Unrecoverable error
Controller/drive not connected
Over temperature condition
Side panel not installed
Autoloader reported tape not loaded properly
n = 5, Hard drive
= 6, CD-ROM drive
= 7, Tape drive.
yy = 00, ID
= 03, Power check
= 05, Read
= 06, SA/Media
= 08, Controller
= 23, Random read
= 28, Media load/unload
A.21 POINTING DEVICE INTERFACE ERROR MESSAGES (8601-xx)
Table A-20.
Pointing Device Interface Error Messages
Message
8601-01
8601-02
8601-03
8601-04
8601-05
8601-06
Probable Cause
Mouse ID fails
Message
8601-07
8601-08
8601-09
8601-10
8602-xx
--
Probable Cause
Right block not selected
Timeout occurred
Mouse loopback test failed
Pointing device is inoperative
I/F test failed
Left mouse button is inoperative
Left mouse button is stuck closed
Right mouse button is inoperative
Right mouse button is stuck closed
Left block not selected
--
Compaq Personal Computers A-11
Changed – January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Error Messages and Codes
A.22 CEMM PRIVILEDGED OPS ERROR MESSAGES
Table A-21.
CEMM Privileged Ops Error Messages
Message
Probable Cause
LGDT instruction
LIDT instruction
LMSW instruction
LL2 instruction
Message
Probable Cause
LL3 instruction
MOV CRx instruction
MOV DRx instruction
MOV TRx instruction
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
A.23 CEMM EXCEPTION ERROR MESSAGES
Table A-22.
CEMM Exception Error Messages
Message
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Probable Cause
Divide
Debug
NMI or parity
INT 0 (arithmetic overflow)
INT 3
Array bounds check
Invalid opcode
Coprocessor device not available
Double fault
Message
Probable Cause
Invalid TSS
Segment not present
Stack full
General protection fault
Page fault
Coprocessor
Attempt to write to protected area
Reserved
Invalid software interrupt
--
10
11
12
13
14
16
32
33
34
--
08
09
Coprocessor segment overrun
A-12 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - January 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Appendix B
ASCII CHARACTER SET
B.1 INTRODUCTION
This appendix lists, in Table B-1, the 256-character ASCII code set including the decimal and
hexadecimal values. All ASCII symbols may be called while in DOS or using standard text-
Alt
mode editors by using the combination keystroke of holding the
Keypad to enter the decimal value of the symbol. The extended ASCII characters (decimals 128-
Alt
key and using the Numeric
255) can only be called using the
+ Numeric Keypad keys.
NOTE: Regarding keystrokes, refer to notes at the end of the table. Applications may interpret
multiple keystroke accesses differently or ignore them completely.
Table B-1.
ASCII Character Set
Dec
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hex
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
Symbol Dec
Hex
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
Symbol Dec
Hex
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
Symbol Dec
Hex
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
Symbol
Blank
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Space
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
96
97
98
99
‘
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
I
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
!
“
♥
♦
♣
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
*
+
`
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
♠
ꢀ
❍
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
J
K
L
-
.
/
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
↕
!!
¶
§
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
↕
↑
↓
→
←
;
<
=
>
?
\
]
^
_
|
}
↔
ꢁ
~
[1]
ꢂ
Continued
Compaq Personal Computers
B-1
Original - July 1996
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B ASCII Character Set
Table B-1. ASCII Code Set (Continued)
Dec
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
NOTES:
Hex
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
Symbol Dec
Hex
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
Symbol Dec
Hex
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
Symbol
Dec
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Hex
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
Symbol
Ç
á
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
î
ì
Ä
Å
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
Ö
Ü
¢
£
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
º
¿
ß
µ
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
¬
½
¼
¡
«
»
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
÷
°
·
¥
²
190
191
ƒ
Blank
[1] Symbol not displayed.
Keystroke Guide:
Dec #
0
Keystroke(s)
Ctrl 2
1-26
27
Ctrl A thru Z respectively
Ctrl [
28
Ctrl
29
Ctrl ]
30
31
Ctrl 6
Ctrl -
32
Space Bar
33-43
44-47
48-57
58
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol, numerical keypad w/Num Lock active
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
59
60
61
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
62-64
65-90
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol or key w/corresponding symbol and
Caps Lock active
91-93
94, 95
96
Key w/corresponding symbol
Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
Key w/corresponding symbol
97-126 Key w/corresponding symbol or Shift and key w/corresponding symbol
and Caps Lock active
127
Ctrl -
128-255 Alt and decimal digit(s) of desired character
B-2 Compaq Personal Computers
Original - July 1996
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Appendix C
KEYBOARD
C.1 INTRODUCTION
This appendix describes the Compaq keyboard that is included as standard with the system unit.
The keyboard complies with the industry-standard classification of an “enhanced keyboard” and
includes a separate cursor control key cluster, twelve “function” keys, and enhanced
programmability for additional functions.
This appendix covers the following keyboard types:
♦
♦
Standard enhanced keyboard.
Space-Saver Windows-version keyboard featuring additional keys for specific support of the
Windows operating system.
♦
Easy Access keyboard with additional buttons for internet accessibility functions.
Only one type of keyboard is supplied with each system. Other types may be available as an
option.
NOTE: This appendix discusses only the keyboard unit. The keyboard interface is a
function of the system unit and is discussed in Chapter 5, Input/Output Interfaces.
Topics covered in this appendix include the following:
♦
♦
Keystroke processing (C.2)
Connectors (C.3)
page C-2
page C-15
Compaq Personal Computers
C-1
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
C.2 KEYSTROKE PROCESSING
A functional block diagram of the keystroke processing elements is shown in Figure C-1. Power
(+5 VDC) is obtained from the system through the PS/2-type interface. The keyboard uses a
Z86C14 (or equivalent) microprocessor. The Z86C14 scans the key matrix drivers every 10 ms
for pressed keys while at the same time monitoring communications with the keyboard interface
of the system unit. When a key is pressed, a Make code is generated. A Break code is generated
when the key is released. The Make and Break codes are collectively referred to as scan codes.
All keys generate Make and Break codes with the exception of the Pause key, which generates a
Make code only.
Scroll
Lock
Num
Lock
Caps
Lock
Matrix
Drivers
Data/
CLK
Keyboard
Interface
(System Unit)
Keyswitch
Matrix
Keyboard
Processor
Matrix
Receivers
Figure C–1. Keystroke Processing Elements, Block Diagram
When the system is turned on, the keyboard processor generates a Power-On Reset (POR) signal
after a period of 150 ms to 2 seconds. The keyboard undergoes a Basic Assurance Test (BAT)
that checks for shorted keys and basic operation of the keyboard processor. The BAT takes from
300 to 500 ms to complete.
If the keyboard fails the BAT, an error code is sent to the CPU and the keyboard is disabled until
an input command is received. After successful completion of the POR and BAT, a completion
code (AAh) is sent to the CPU and the scanning process begins.
The keyboard processor includes a 16-byte FIFO buffer for holding scan codes until the system is
ready to receive them. Response and typematic codes are not buffered. If the buffer is full (16
bytes held) a 17th byte of a successive scan code results in an overrun condition and the overrun
code replaces the scan code byte and any additional scan code data (and the respective key
strokes) are lost. Multi-byte sequences must fit entirely into the buffer before the respective
keystroke can be registered.
C-2 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
C.2.1 PS/2-TYPE KEYBOARD TRANSMISSIONS
The PS/2-type keyboard sends two main types of data to the system; commands (or responses to
system commands) and keystroke scan codes. Before the keyboard sends data to the system
(specifically, to the 8042-type logic within the system), the keyboard verifies the clock and data
lines to the system. If the clock signal is low (0), the keyboard recognizes the inhibited state and
loads the data into a buffer. Once the inhibited state is removed, the data is sent to the system.
Keyboard-to-system transfers (in the default mode) consist of 11 bits as shown in Figure C-2.
Tcy
Tcl
Tch
Clock
Th-b-t
(LSb)
(MSb)
Start
Bit
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
Data
0
Data
1
Data
2
Data
3
Data
4
Data
5
Data
5
Data
7
Data
Parameter
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
Tcy (clock cycle)
Tcl (clock low)
Tch (clock high)
60 us
30 us
30 us
--
--
41 us
--
80 us
50 us
40 us
--
Th-t-t (high-before-transmit)
20 us
Figure C–2. PS/2 Keyboard-To-System Transmission, Timing Diagram
The system can halt keyboard transmission by setting the clock signal low. The keyboard checks
the clock line every 60 us to verify the state of the signal. If a low is detected, the keyboard will
finish the current transmission if the rising edge of the clock pulse for the parity bit has not
occurred. The system uses the same timing relationships during reads (typically with slightly
reduced time periods).
The enhanced keyboard has three operating modes:
♦
♦
♦
Mode 1 - PC-XT compatible
Mode 2 - PC-AT compatible (default)
Mode 3 - Select mode (keys are programmable as to make-only, break-only, typematic)
Modes can be selected by the user or set by the system. Mode 2 is the default mode. Each mode
produces a different set of scan codes. When a key is pressed, the keyboard processor sends that
key’s make code to the 8042 logic of the system unit. The When the key is released, a release
code is transmitted as well (except for the Pause key, which produces only a make code). The
8042-type logic of the system unit responds to scan code reception by asserting IRQ1, which is
processed by the interrupt logic and serviced by the CPU with an interrupt service routine. The
service routine takes the appropriate action based on which key was pressed.
Compaq Personal Computers
C-3
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
C.2.2 USB-TYPE KEYBOARD TRANSMISSIONS
The USB-type keyboard sends essentially the same information to the system that the PS/2
keyboard does, except that the data receives additional NRZI encoding and formatting (prior to
leaving the keyboard) to comply with the USB I/F specification (discussed in chapter 5 of this
guide).
Packets received at the system’s USB I/F and decoded as originating from the keyboard result in
an SMI being generated. An SMI handler routine is invoked that decodes the data and transfers
the information to the 8042 keyboard controller where normal (legacy) keyboard processing takes
place.
C-4 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
C.2.3 KEYBOARD LAYOUTS
Figures C-3 through C-8 show the key layouts for keyboards shipped with Compaq systems.
Actual styling details including location of the Compaq logo as well as the numbers lock, caps
lock, and scroll lock LEDs may vary.
C.2.3.1 Standard Enhanced Keyboards
6
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10 11 12 13
14 15 16
36
38
58
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
28
31
30
71
86
32 33 34
52 53 54
35
37
17
27
29
50
55 56 57
72 73 74
88 89 90
39
59
75
92
48 49
68 69
51
70
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83
93 94
87
84 85
95
91
96
100
101
97 98 99
Figure C–3. U.S. English (101-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
6
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10 11 12 13
14 15 16
36
38
58
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
28
31
32 33 34
52 53 54
35
37
17
27
29
50
55 56 57
72 73 74
88 89 90
39
59
75
92
48 49
68 69
51
71
70
103
86
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83
87
84 85
95
104
91
93
94
96
100
101
97 98 99
Figure C–4. National (102-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
Compaq Personal Computers
C-5
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
C.2.3.2
Windows Enhanced Keyboards
6
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10 11 12 13
14 15 16
36
38
58
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
28
31
30
71
86
32 33 34
52 53 54
35
37
17
27
29
50
55 56 57
72 73 74
88 89 90
39
59
75
92
48 49
68 69
51
70
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83
93 94
87
84 85
95
91
96
100
101
97 98 99
110
111 112
Figure C–5. U.S. English Windows (101W-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
6
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10 11 12 13
14 15 16
36
38
58
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
28
31
32 33 34
52 53 54
35
37
17
27
29
50
55 56 57
72 73 74
88 89 90
39
59
48 49
68 69
51
71
70
103
86
75
92
76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83
87
84 85
95
104
110
91
100
101
96
97 98 99
93
94
111 112
Figure C–6. National Windows (102W-Key) Keyboard Key Positions
C-6 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
C.2.3.3 Easy Access Keyboards
The Easy Access keyboard, such as that shipped with the Compaq iPaq system, is a Windows
Enhanced-type keyboard that includes special buttons (Figure C-7) allowing quick internet
navigation. Depending on the system, either a legacy PS/2-type keyboard or a Universal Serial
Bus (USB) type keyboard may be employed. Either type uses the layout shown in the following
figure.
Btn 1 Btn 2 Btn 3 Btn 4 Btn 5 Btn 6 Btn 7
NOTE:
Main key positions same as Windows Enhanced (Figures C-5 or C-6).
Figure C–7. Easy Access Key Positions
Compaq Personal Computers
C-7
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
C.2.4 KEYS
All keys generate a make code (when pressed) and a break code (when released) with the
exception of the Pause key (pos. 16), which produces a make code only. All keys with the
exception of the Pause and Easy Access keys are also typematic, although the typematic action
of the Shift, Ctrl, Alt, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Caps Lock, and Ins keys is suppressed by
the BIOS. Typematic keys, when held down longer than 500 ms, send the make code repetitively
at a 10-12 Hz rate until the key is released. If more than one key is held down, the last key
pressed will be typematic.
C.2.4.1 Special Single-Keystroke Functions
The following keys provide the intended function in most applications and environments.
Caps Lock - The Caps Lock key (pos. 59), when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS
routine that turns on the caps lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 40-49, 60-68,
and 76-82. When pressed and released again, these keys revert to the lower case state and the
LED is turned off. Use of the Shift key will reverse which state these keys are in based on the
Caps Lock key.
Num Lock - The Num Lock key (pos. 32), when pressed and released, invokes a BIOS routine
that turns on the num lock LED and shifts into upper case key positions 55-57, 72-74, 88-90,
100, and 101. When pressed and released again, these keys revert to the lower case state and the
LED is turned off.
The following keys provide special functions that require specific support by the application.
Print Scrn - The Print Scrn (pos. 14) key can, when pressed, generate an interrupt that
initiates a print routine. This function may be inhibited by the application.
Scroll Lock - The Scroll Lock key (pos. 15) when pressed and released, , invokes a BIOS
routine that turns on the scroll lock LED and inhibits movement of the cursor. When pressed and
released again, the LED is turned off and the function is removed. This keystroke is always
serviced by the BIOS (as indicated by the LED) but may be inhibited or ignored by the
application.
Pause - The Pause (pos. 16) key, when pressed, can be used to cause the keyboard interrupt to
loop, i.e., wait for another key to be pressed. This can be used to momentarily suspend an
operation. The key that is pressed to resume operation is discarded. This function may be ignored
by the application.
The Esc, Fn (function), Insert, Home, Page Up/Down, Delete, and End keys operate at the
discretion of the application software.
C-8 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
C.2.4.2
Multi-Keystroke Functions
Shift - The Shift key (pos. 75/86), when held down, produces a shift state (upper case) for keys
in positions 17-29, 30, 39-51, 60-70, and 76-85 as long as the Caps Lock key (pos. 59) is
toggled off. If the Caps Lock key is toggled on, then a held Shift key produces the lower
(normal) case for the identified pressed keys. The Shift key also reverses the Num Lock state of
key positions 55-57, 72, 74, 88-90, 100, and 101.
Ctrl - The Ctrl keys (pos. 92/96) can be used in conjunction with keys in positions 1-13, 16, 17-
34, 39-54, 60-71, and 76-84. The application determines the actual function. Both Ctrl key
positions provide identical functionality. The pressed combination of Ctrl and Break (pos. 16)
results in the generation of BIOS function INT 1Bh. This software interrupt provides a method of
exiting an application and generally halts execution of the current program.
Alt - The Alt keys (pos. 93/95) can be used in conjunction with the same keys available for use
with the Ctrl keys with the exception that position 14 (SysRq) is available instead of position
16 (Break). The Alt key can also be used in conjunction with the numeric keypad keys (pos. 55-
57, 72-74, and 88-90) to enter the decimal value of an ASCII character code from 1-255. The
application determines the actual function of the keystrokes. Both Alt key positions provide
identical functionality. The combination keystroke of Alt and SysRq results in software
interrupt 15h, AX=8500h being executed. It is up to the application to use or not use this BIOS
function.
The Ctrl and Alt keys can be used together in conjunction with keys in positions 1-13, 17-34, 39-
54, 60-71, and 76-84. The Ctrl and Alt key positions used and the sequence in which they are
pressed make no difference as long as they are held down at the time the third key is pressed. The
Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keystroke combination (required twice if in the Windows environment)
initiates a system reset (warm boot) that is handled by the BIOS.
C.2.4.3 Windows Keystrokes
Windows-enhanced keyboards include three additional key positions. Key positions 110 and 111
(marked with the Windows logo
) have the same functionality and are used by themselves
or in combination with other keys to perform specific “hot-key” type functions for the Windows
operating system. The defined functions of the Windows logo keys are listed as follows:
Keystroke
Function
Window Logo
Open Start menu
Window Logo + F1
Window Logo + TAB
Window Logo + E
Window Logo + F
Window Logo + CTRL + F
Window Logo + M
Shift + Window Logo + M
Window Logo + R
Window Logo + PAUSE
Window Logo + 0-9
Display pop-up menu for the selected object
Activate next task bar button
Explore my computer
Find document
Find computer
Minimize all
Undo minimize all
Display Run dialog box
Perform system function
Reserved for OEM use (see following text)
The combination keystroke of the Window Logo + 1-0 keys are reserved for OEM use for
auxiliary functions (speaker volume, monitor brightness, password, etc.).
Key position 112 (marked with an application window icon
other keys for invoking Windows application functions.
) is used in combination with
Compaq Personal Computers
C-9
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
C.2.4.4 Easy Access Keystrokes
The Easy Access keyboard (Figure C-7) includes additional keys (also referred to as buttons) used
to streamline internet navigation.
These buttons have the default functionality described below:
Button #
Description
Check email
Default Function
Email
Emoney
Compaq web site
AltaVista web site
Search
Travel expenses
Shopping
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Go to community
Extra web site
Go to favorite web site
Internet search
Instant answer
E-commerce
All buttons may be re-programmed by the user through the Easy Access utility.
C-10 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
C.2.5 KEYBOARD COMMANDS
Table C-1 lists the commands that the keyboard can send to the system (specifically, to the 8042-
type logic).
Table C-1.
Keyboard-to-System Commands
Command
Key Detection Error/Over/run
Value
00h [1]
FFh [2]
AAh
FCh
EEh
Description
Indicates to the system that a switch closure couldn’t be
identified.
Indicates to the system that the BAT has been successful.
Indicates failure of the BAT by the keyboard.
Indicates that the Echo command was received by the
keyboard.
BAT Completion
BAT Failure
Echo
Acknowledge (ACK)
FAh
Issued by the keyboard as a response to valid system
inputs (except the Echo and Resend commands).
Issued by the keyboard following an invalid input.
Upon receipt of the Read ID command from the system, the
keyboard issues the ACK command followed by the two IDS
bytes.
Resend
Keyboard ID
FEh
83ABh
Note:
[1] Modes 2 and 3.
[2] Mode 1 only.
C.2.6 SCAN CODES
The scan codes generated by the keyboard processor are determined by the mode the keyboard is
operating in.
♦
♦
Mode 1:
In Mode 1 operation, the keyboard generates scan codes compatible with 8088-
/8086-based systems. To enter Mode 1, the scan code translation function of the keyboard
controller must be disabled. Since translation is not performed, the scan codes generated in
Mode 1 are identical to the codes required by BIOS. Mode 1 is initiated by sending command
F0h with the 01h option byte. Applications can obtain system codes and status information
by using BIOS function INT 16h with AH=00h, 01h, and 02h.
Mode 2:
Mode 2 is the default mode for keyboard operation. In this mode, the 8042 logic
translates the make codes from the keyboard processor into the codes required by the BIOS.
This mode was made necessary with the development of the Enhanced III keyboard, which
includes additional functions over earlier standard keyboards. Applications should use BIOS
function INT 16h, with AH=10h, 11h, and 12h for obtaining codes and status data. In Mode
2, the keyboard generates the Break code, a two-byte sequence that consists of a Make code
immediately preceded by F0h (i.e., Break code for 0Eh is “F0h 0Eh”).
♦
Mode 3:
Mode 3 generates a different scan code set from Modes 1 and 2. Code
translation must be disabled since translation for this mode cannot be done.
Compaq Personal Computers C-11
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
Table C-2.
Keyboard Scan Codes
Make / Break Codes (Hex)
Key
Pos.
1
Legend
Esc
F1
Mode 1
01/81
3B/BB
Mode 2
76/F0 76
05/F0 05
Mode 3
08/na
07/na
0F/na
17/na
1F/na
27/na
2F/na
37/na
3F/na
47/na
4F/na
56/na
5E/na
57/na
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
Print Scrn
3C/BC
3D/BD
3E/BE
3F/BF
40/C0
41/C1
42/C2
43/C3
06/F0 06
04/F0 04
0C/F0 0C
03/F0 03
0B/F0 0B
83/F0 83
0A/F0 0A
01/FO 01
44/C4
57/D7
58/D8
09/F0 09
78/F0 78
07/F0 07
E0 2A E0 37/E0 B7 E0 AA
E0 2A E0 7C/E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12
E0 7C/E0 F0 7C [1] [2]
84/F0 84 [3]
E0 37/E0 B7 [1] [2]
54/84 [3]
15
16
Scroll Lock
Pause
46/C6
E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5/na
E0 46 E0 C6/na [3]
7E/F0 7E
5F/na
62/na
E1 14 77 E1 F0 14 F0 77/na
E0 7E E0 F0 7E/na [3]
0E/F0 E0
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
`
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
=
\
29/A9
02/82
03/83
04/84
05/85
06/86
07/87
08/88
09/89
0A/8A
0B/8B
0C/8C
0D/8D
0E/F0 0E
46/F0 46
1E/F0 1E
26/F0 26
25/F0 25
2E/F0 2E
36/F0 36
3D/F0 3D
3E/F0 3E
46/F0 46
45/F0 45
4E/F0 4E
55/F0 55
5C/F0 5C
66/F0 66
67/na
16/F0 16
1E/F0 1E
26/F0 26
25/F0 25
2E/F0 2E
36/F0 36
3D/F0 3D
3E/F0 3E
46/F0 46
45/F0 45
4E/F0 4E
55/F0 55
5D/F0 5D
66/F0 66
2B/AB
0E/8E
Backspace
Insert
E0 52/E0 D2
E0 70/E0 F0 70
E0 F0 12 E0 70/E0 F0 70 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 70/E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12 [6]
E0 6C/E0 F0 6C
E0 F0 12 E0 6C/E0 F0 6C E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 6C/E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12 [6]
E0 7D/E0 F0 7D
E0 F0 12 E0 7D/E0 F0 7D E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 7D/E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12 [6]
77/F0 77
E0 AA E0 52/E0 D2 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 52/E0 D2 E0 AA [6]
E0 47/E0 D2
E0 AA E0 52/E0 D2 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 47/E0 C7 E0 AA [6]
E0 49/E0 C7
E0 AA E0 49/E0 C9 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 49/E0 C9 E0 AA [6]
45/C5
33
34
Home
6E/na
6F/na
Page Up
35
36
Num Lock
/
76/na
77/na
E0 35/E0 B5
E0 AA E0 35/E0 B5 E0 2A [1]
37/B7
E0 4A/E0 F0 4A
E0 F0 12 E0 4A/E0 F0 4A E0 12 [1]
7C/F0 7C
37
38
39
40
*
-
7E/na
84/na
0D/na
15/na
4A/CA
0F/8F
10/90
7B/F0 7B
0D/F0 0D
15/F0 15
Tab
Q
Continued
([x] Notes listed at end of table.)
C-12 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
Table C-2. Keyboard Scan Codes (Continued)
Make / Break Codes (Hex)
Key
Pos
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Legend
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
[
]
Mode 1
11/91
12/92
13/93
14/94
15/95
16/96
17/97
18/98
19/99
1A/9A
1B/9B
Mode 2
1D/F0 1D
24/F0 24
2D/F0 2D
2C/F0 2C
35/F0 35
3C/F0 3C
43/F0 43
44/F0 44
Mode 3
1D/F0 1D
24/F0 24
2D/F0 2D
2C/F0 2C
35/F0 35
3C/F0 3C
43/F0 43
44/F0 44
4D/F0 4D
54/F0 54
5B/F0 5B
64/F0 64
4D/F0 4D
54/F0 54
5B/F0 5B
Delete
E0 53/E0 D3
E0 71/E0 F0 71
E0 F0 12 E0 71/E0 F0 71 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 71/E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12 [6]
E0 69/E0 F0 69
E0 F0 12 E0 69/E0 F0 69 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 69/E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12 [6]
E0 7A/E0 F0 7A
E0 F0 12 E0 7A/E0 F0 7A E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 7A/E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12 [6]
6C/F0 6C [6]
75/F0 75 [6]
E0 AA E0 53/E0 D3 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 53/E0 D3 E0 AA [6]
53
54
End
E0 4F/E0 CF
65/F0 65
6D/F0 6D
E0 AA E0 4F/E0 CF E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 4F/E0 CF E0 AA [6]
Page Down
E0 51/E0 D1
E0 AA E0 51/E0 D1 E0 2A [4]
E0 @a E0 51/E0 D1 E0 AA [6]
47/C7 [6]
48/C8 [6]
49/C9 [6]
4E/CE [6]
3A/BA
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
7
8
9
+
6C/na [6]
75/na [6]
7D/na [6]
7C/F0 7C
14/F0 14
1C/F0 1C
1B/F0 1B
23/F0 23
2B/F0 2B
34/F0 34
33/F0 33
3B/F0 3B
42/F0 42
4B/F0 4B
4C/F0 4C
52/F0 52
5A/F0 5A
6B/na [6]
73/na [6]
74/na [6]
12/F0 12
1A/F0 1A
22/F0 22
21/F0 21
2A/F0 2A
32/F0 32
7D/F0 7D [6]
79/F0 79 [6]
58/F0 58
Caps Lock
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
;
‘
Enter
4
5
6
1E/9E
1F/9F
20/A0
21/A1
22/A2
23/A3
24/A4
25/A5
26/A6
27/A7
28/A8
1C/9C
4B/CB [6]
4C/CC [6]
4D/CD [6]
2A/AA
2C/AC
2D/AD
1C/F0 1C
1B/F0 1B
23/F0 23
2B/F0 2B
34/F0 34
33/F0 33
3B/F0 3B
42/F0 42
4B/F0 4B
4C/F0 4C
52/F0 52
5A/F0 5A
6B/F0 6B [6]
73/F0 73 [6]
74/F0 74 [6]
12/F0 12
1A/F0 1A
Shift (left)
Z
X
C
V
B
22/F0 22
21/F0 21
2A/F0 2A
32/F0 32
2E/AE
2F/AF
30/B0
Continued
([x] Notes listed at end of table.)
Compaq Personal Computers C-13
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
Table C-2. Keyboard Scan Codes (Continued)
Make / Break Codes (Hex)
Key
Pos.
81
Legend
N
Mode 1
31/B1
Mode 2
31/F0 31
Mode 3
31/F0 31
3A/F0 3A
41/F0 41
49/F0 49
4A/F0 4A
59/F0 59
63/F0 63
82
83
84
85
86
87
M
,
.
/
32/B2
33/B3
34/B4
35/B5
3A/F0 3A
41/F0 41
49/F0 49
4A/F0 4A
Shift (right)
36/B6
59/F0 59
E0 48/E0 C8
E0 75/E0 F0 75
E0 AA E0 48/E0 C8 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 48/E0 C8 E0 AA [6]
4F/CF [6]
E0 F0 12 E0 75/E0 F0 75 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 75/E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12 [6]
69/F0 69 [6]
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
1
2
3
69/na [6]
72/na [6]
7A/na [6]
79/F0 79[6]
11/F0 11
19/F0 19
29/F0 29
39/na
50/D0 [6]
51/D1 [6]
E0 1C/E0 9C
72/F0 72 [6]
7A/F0 7A [6]
E0 5A/F0 E0 5A
Enter
Ctrl (left)
Alt (left)
(Space)
Alt (right)
Ctrl (right)
1D/9D
38/B8
39/B9
14/F0 14
11/F0 11
29/F0 29
E0 38/E0 B8
E0 1D/E0 9D
E0 4B/E0 CB
E0 11/F0 E0 11
E0 14/F0 E0 14
E0 6B/Eo F0 6B
58/na
61/F0 61
E0 AA E0 4B/E0 CB E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 4B/E0 CB E0 AA [6]
E0 50/E0 D0
E0 AA E0 50/E0 D0 E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 50/E0 D0 E0 AA [6]
E0 4D/E0 CD
E0 F0 12 E0 6B/E0 F0 6B E0 12[5]
E0 12 E0 6B/E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12[6]
E0 72/E0 F0 72
E0 F0 12 E0 72/E0 F0 72 E0 12[5]
E0 12 E0 72/E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12[6]
E0 74/E0 F0 74
98
99
60/F0 60
6A/F0 6A
E0 AA E0 4D/E0 CD E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 4D/E0 CD E0 AA [6]
52/D2 [6]
E0 F0 12 E0 74/E0 F0 74 E0 12[5]
E0 12 E0 74/E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12[6]
70/F0 70 [6]
100
101
102
103
104
110
0
.
na
na
70/na [6]
71/na [6]
7B/F0 7B
53/F0 53
13/F0 13
8B/F0 8B
53/D3 [6]
7E/FE
2B/AB
36/D6
71/F0 71 [6]
6D/F0 6D
5D/F0 5D
61/F0 61
na
(Win95) [7]
E0 5B/E0 DB
E0 1F/E0 F0 1F
E0 AA E0 5B/E0 DB E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 5B/E0 DB E0 AA [6]
E0 5C/E0 DC
E0 AA E0 5C/E0 DC E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 5C/E0 DC E0 AA [6]
E0 5D/E0 DD
E0 AA E0 5D/E0 DD E0 2A [4]
E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA [6]
E0 1E/E0 9E
E0 F0 12 E0 1F/E0 F0 1F E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 1F/E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12 [6]
E0 2F/E0 F0 27
E0 F0 12 E0 27/E0 F0 27 E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 27/E0 F0 27 E0 F0 12 [6]
E0 2F/E0 F0 2F
E0 F0 12 E0 2F/E0 F0 2F E0 12 [5]
E0 12 E0 2F/E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12 [6
E0 1C/E0 F0 1C
111
112
(Win95) [7]
8C/F0 8C
8D/F0 8D
(Win Apps)
[7]
Btn 1
Btn 2
Btn 3
Btn 4
Btn 5
Btn 6
Btn 7
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
[8]
95/F0 95
9C/F0 9C
9D/F0 9D
9A/F0 9A
99/F0 99
96/F0 96
97/F0 97
E0 26/E0 A6
E0 25/E0 A5
E0 23/E0 A3
E0 21/E0 A1
E0 12/E0 92
E0 32/E0 B2
E0 4B/E0 F0 4B
E0 42/E0 F0 42
E0 33/E0 F0 33
E0 2B/E0 F0 2B
E0 24/E0 F0 24
E0 3A/E0 F0 3A
NOTES:
All codes assume Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys inactive unless otherwise noted.
NA = Not applicable
[1] Shift (left) key active.
[2] Ctrl key active.
[3] Alt key active.
[4] Left Shift key active. For active right Shift key, substitute AA/2A make/break codes for B6/36 codes.
[5] Left Shift key active. For active right Shift key, substitute F0 12/12 make/break codes
for F0 59/59 codes.
[6] Num Lock key active.
[7] Windows keyboards only.
[8] Easy Access keyboards only.
C-14 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Reference Guide
C.3 CONNECTORS
Two types of keyboard interfaces are used in Compaq systems: PS/2-type and USB-type. Systems
that provide a PS/2 connector will ship with a PS/2-type keyboard but may also support
simultaneous connection of a USB keyboard. Systems that do not provide a PS/2 interface will
ship with a USB keyboard. For a detailed description of the PS/2 and USB interfaces refer to the
Input/Output chapter of this guide. The keyboard cable connectors and their pinouts are described
in the following figures:
Pin
1
2
Function
Data
Not connected
Ground
5
6
3
3
4
4
5
+5 VDC
Clock
1
2
6
Not connected
Figure C–8. PS/2 Keyboard Cable Connector (Male)
Pin
1
2
3
4
Function
+5 VDC
Data (+)
Data (-)
Ground
4
3
2
1
Figure C–9. USB Keyboard Cable Connector (Male)
Compaq Personal Computers C-15
Changed –- March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Keyboard
This page is intentionally blank.
C-16 Compaq Personal Computers
Changed - March 2000
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
abbreviations, 1-3
Connector (cont)
AC97 link bus, 5-28
Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP), 4-8
ACPI, 5-34
acronyms, 1-3
AGP, 4-8, 6-2
Universal Serial Bus interface, 5-25
cooling, 4-28
core voltage, 3-2, 3-3
Desktop Management, 8-2
DIMM, 3-5
AOL requirements, 5-33
APM, 5-34
APM BIOS functions, 8-17
APM BIOS support, 8-15
ASCII character set, B-1
audio, 5-26
DIMM detection, 8-11
DIMM support, 8-5
diskette drive interface, 5-4
display cache, 6-2
display modes, 6-4
DMI, 8-13
audio controller (AC97), 5-28
audio subsystem, 2-15
battery replacement, 4-17
BIOS upgrading, 8-18
BIOS, ROM, 8-1
drive fault prediction, 8-5, 8-6
East Access keys, C-10
EIDE interface, 5-1
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), 5-9
error codes, A-1
BIOS, video (graphics), 6-3
bus, hub link, 4-6
bus, LPC, 4-6
cable lock, 4-28
CAS latency, 3-5
error messages, A-1
events, wake up, 7-3
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP), 5-9
fault prediction, drive, 8-6
features, standard, 2-2
FlexATX, 2-7
Celeron processor, 2-10, 2-11, 3-2
chipset, 2-12
GPIO, 3-2, 3-3
CMOS, 4-17
CMOS, clearing, 4-18
codec, audio, 5-29
Configuration Cycle, 4-4
configuration cycle (PCI), 4-4
configuration memory, 4-17
configuration space (PCI), 4-5
Connector
graphics subsystem, 2-14, 6-1
graphics, 810e embedded, 6-2
heat sink (processor), 2-11
Hub link bus, 4-6
I/O map, 4-29, 8-9
IDE interface, 5-1
IDSEL, 4-4
index addressing, 1-2
interface
Audio, CD, 5-27
audio, headphones out, 5-26
audio, line in, 5-26
audio, 2-15, 5-26
diskette drive, 5-4
audio, line out, 5-26
Audio, Mic In, 5-26
Audio, Speaker, 5-27
display (VGA monitor), 6-6
IDE interface, 5-3
IDE, 5-1
keyboard/pointing device, 5-15
parallel, 2-14, 5-8
serial, 2-14, 5-5
USB, 2-14, 5-22
IDE interface (CD-ROM), 5-4
keyboard/pointing device interface, 5-21
Network RJ-45, 5-36
parallel interface, 5-14
serial interface (RS-232), 5-5, 5-6
interrupts
maskable (IRQn), 4-12
nonmaskable (NMI, SMI), 4-14
interrupts, PCI, 4-6
interval timer, 4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
key (keyboard) functions, C-8
keyboard, C-1
keyboard (micro)processor, C-2
keyboard layouts, C-5
keyboard, USB, C-4
processor upgrading, 2-11, 3-4
processor, Celeron, 2-11, 3-2
processor, Pentium II, 2-11
RAM, 2-13
RAMDAC, 6-3
keyboard/pointing device interface, 5-15
keys, Easy Access, C-10
low voltages, 7-4
reference sources, 1-1
remote wake up, 5-34
ROM BIOS, 8-1
LPC bus, 4-6
RS-232, 5-5, 5-6
Magic Packet, 5-34
RTC, 4-17
mass storage, 2-14
scan codes (keyboard), C-11
SDRAM, 3-5
media write protect function (BIOS), 8-10
memory detection, 8-11
memory map, 3-7
memory, system, 3-5
memory, system (RAM), 2-13
MMX, 3-2
security functions (BIOS), 8-10
sensor, thermal, 4-28
serial interface, 2-14, 5-5
sideband addressing, 4-9
signal distribution, 7-5
SIMD, 3-2, 3-3
monitor power control, 6-6
motherboard, 2-7
SMBIOS, 8-13
mouse interface, 5-17
MultiBay, 2-14
SMI, 4-15
specifications
network interface controller (NIC), 5-33
network support, 5-32
notational conventions, 1-1, 1-2
NUM lock, 3-5
electrical, 2-16
environmental, 2-15
power supply, 7-5
Specifications
options, 2-3
24x CD-ROM Drive, 2-16, 2-17
Audio subsystem, 5-31
Hard Drive, 2-18
parallel interface, 2-14, 5-8
password, clearing, 4-18
password, power-on, 4-27, 4-28
PCI bus, 4-2
specifications, system, 2-15
SSE, 3-3
PCI Configuration Space, 4-5
PCI interrupts, 4-6
system board, 2-7
system ID, 8-4
Pentium II, 2-12
system information table (SIT), 8-4
system memory, 2-13, 3-5
system ROM, 8-1
thermal sensing, 4-28
timer, interval, 4-16
typematic, C-8
Pentium II processor, 2-11
Pentium III processor, 2-10, 3-3
pinouts, header (connector), 7-6
Plug ’n Play, 2-2, 2-14, 8-12
Plug 'n Play BIOS function, 8-12
power button, 7-3
UART, 5-5
power distribution, 7-4
power management
Universal Serial Bus (USB) interface, 5-22
upggrading BIOS, 8-18
upgrading embedded graphics, 6-4
upgrading, processor, 2-11, 3-4
USB interface, 5-22
USB keyboard, C-4
USB legacy support, 8-17
USB ports, 2-14
ACPI, 4-28
network interface controller (NIC), 5-34
PCI, 4-6
power management BIOS function, 8-14
power states, system, 8-14
power supply, 7-1
power supply assembly, 7-2
power-on password, 4-27, 4-28
PPGA370, 3-2
video BIOS, 6-3
voltage, core, 3-2, 3-3
wake up events, 7-3
wake up, remote, 5-34
WOL, 7-3
processor
Celeron, 2-10, 3-2
Pentium III, 2-10, 3-3
ZIF socket, 2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|